diff options
Diffstat (limited to '15951-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 15951-h/15951-h.htm | 7583 |
1 files changed, 7583 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/15951-h/15951-h.htm b/15951-h/15951-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..378f059 --- /dev/null +++ b/15951-h/15951-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7583 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="CONTENT-TYPE" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> +<title>A Sea Queen's Sailing</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + pre {text-align: center; font-size: 10pt;} + p {text-indent: 4% } + caption {text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; font-weight: bold; + letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial";} + td { font-family: "Arial";} + thead { font-weight: bold;} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right} + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Sea Queen's Sailing, by Charles Whistler + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: A Sea Queen's Sailing + +Author: Charles Whistler + +Release Date: May 31, 2005 [EBook #15951] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A SEA QUEEN'S SAILING *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +</pre> + +<h1>A Sea Queen's Sailing</h1> +<h2>by Charles W. Whistler</h2> +<hr /> +<table cellspacing="5" align="center" summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Old Chief And The Young.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Men Of Three Kingdoms.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Ship Of Silence.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">By Sea And Fire.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Vision And Pursuit.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Sea Queen's Champions.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Treasure Of The King.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Storm And Salvage.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Isle Of Hermits.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Planning And Learning.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Summons Of The Beacons.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">With Sail And Oar.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Athelstane's Foster Son.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Dane And Irishman.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Torque And Its Wearer.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In Old Norway.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Homeward Bound.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Sea Queen's Welcome.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Notes">Notes.</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>Few words of introduction are needed for this story, excepting +such as may refer to the sources of the details involved.</p> +<p>The outfit of the funeral ship is practically that of the vessel +found in the mound at Goekstadt, and now in the museum at +Christiania, supplemented with a few details from the ship +disinterred last year near Toensberg, in the same district. In both +these cases the treasure has been taken from the mound by raiders, +who must have broken into the chamber shortly after the interment; +but other finds have been fully large enough to furnish details of +what would be buried with a chief of note.</p> +<p>With regard to the seamanship involved, there are incidents +recorded in the Sagas, as well as the use of a definite phrase for +"beating to windward," which prove that the handling of a Viking +ship was necessarily much the same as that of a square-rigged +vessel of today. The experience of the men who sailed the +reconstructed duplicate of the Goekstadt ship across the Atlantic +to the Chicago Exhibition bears this out entirely. The powers of +the beautifully designed ship were by no means limited to running +before the wind.</p> +<p>The museum at Christiania has a good example of the full war +gear of a lady of the Viking times.</p> +<p>Hakon, the son of Harald Fairhair, and foster son of our +Athelstane, took the throne of Norway in A.D. 935, which is +approximately the date of the story therefore. The long warfare +waged by Dane and Norseman against the Irishman at that time, and +the incidental troubles of the numerous island hermits on the Irish +coast, are written in the Irish annals, and perhaps most fully in +"the wars of the Gaedhil and the Gaill."</p> +<p>Chas. W. Whistler.</p> +<p>Stockland, 1906.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch1" id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: The Old Chief And The +Young.</h2> +<p>The black smoke eddied and wavered as it rose over my father's +burning hall, and then the little sea breeze took it and swept it +inland over the heath-clad Caithness hills which I loved. Save for +that black cloud, the June sky was bright and blue overhead, and in +the sunshine one could not see the red tongues of flame that were +licking up the last timbers of the house where I was born. Round +the walls, beyond reach of smoke and heat, stood the foemen who had +wrought the harm, and nearer the great door lay those of our men +who had fallen at the first. There were foemen there also, for it +had been a good fight.</p> +<p>At last the roof fell in with a mighty crash and uprush of smoke +and sparks, while out of the smother reeled and staggered half a +dozen men who had in some way escaped the falling timbers. I think +they had been those who still guarded the doorway, being unwounded. +But among them were not my father and brothers, and I knew that I +was the last of my line by that absence.</p> +<p>It was not my fault that I was not lying with them under our +roof yonder. I had headed a charge by a dozen of our best men, when +it seemed that a charge might at least give time for the escape of +the few women of the house to the glen. My father had bidden me, +and we went, and did our best. We won the time we fought for, and +that was all. Some of us got back to the hall, and the rest bided +where they fell. As for me, I had been stunned by an axe blow, +which my helm had turned, and came to myself to find that I was +bound hand and foot, and set aside under the stable wall with two +others of our men, captives also. Thence I must watch all that went +on, helplessly, and after the roof fell I cared no more what should +be done with me, for I was alone and desolate.</p> +<p>Nor did I know who these foemen were, or why they had fallen on +us. In the gray of the morning they had come from inland, and were +round the hall while we broke our fast. We had snatched our weapons +as best we might, and done what we could, but the numbers against +us were too great from the first.</p> +<p>They had come from inland, but they were not Scots. We were at +peace with all the Caithness folk, and had been so for years, +though we had few dealings with them. My father had won a place for +himself and his men here on the Caithness shore in the days when +Harald Harfager had set all Norway under him, for he was one of +those jarls who would not bow to him, and left that old Norse land +which I had never seen. Presently, he handselled peace for himself +here by marriage with my mother, the daughter of a great Scots lord +of the lands; and thereafter had built the hall, and made the +haven, and won a few fields from the once barren hillside. And now +we had been well to do, till this foe came and ended all.</p> +<p>They were not Norsemen either. The Orkney jarls were our +friends, and for us Harald cared not. Norsemen on the Viking path +we knew and welcomed, and being of that brotherhood ourselves, we +had nothing to fear from them. It is true that we owned no king or +overlord, but if the Scots king asked for scatt we paid it, +grumbling, for the sake of peace. My father was wont to call it +rent for the hillsides we tilled.</p> +<p>Yet it would have been better to be swept out of the land by the +Scots we won it from, than to be ruined thus for no reason but that +of wanton savagery and lust of plunder, as it seemed. At least they +would have given us fair warning that they meant to end our stay +among them, and take the place we had made into their own +hands.</p> +<p>Well, no doubt, I should find out more presently. Meanwhile, as +I have said, I cared for naught, lying still without a word. Then +the men from out of the hall were brought and set with us; for, +blinded as they were with the smoke, it had been easy to take them. +That one who was set down next me was black from head to foot and +scorched with the burning, but he tried to laugh as his eyes met +mine. It was Dalfin of Maghera, the Irish guest who was with us. He +had taken a passage in a Norse ship from Belfast, meaning to see +lands across the sea, and had bided here when he found that we +could show him hunting such as he had never heard of. The mighty +aurochs still fed on our hills, and we told tales in hall when +guests wondered at the great heads that were on the walls, of how +this one and that had been won. The ship had put in here to wait +for wind, and of course we were glad to see her crew and hear what +news they had of the greater world.</p> +<p>"Friend," I said, "it is hard that you should be brought to this +pass."</p> +<p>"It has been the best fight I ever knew," he answered. "The only +pity is that it has gone the wrong way. But yonder is a grand +funeral pile for the brave men who have fallen. Surely the smoke +will bring down the whole countryside on these ruffians?"</p> +<p>I shook my head. What happened to us was the affair of no Scot. +Rather they would be setting their own places in order in case +their turn came next.</p> +<p>"Well," said Dalfin, "whom are we fighting, then?"</p> +<p>One of our men answered him. He was a Norseman, named +Sidroc.</p> +<p>"Red hand, wandering Vikings. Wastrels from every land, and no +man's men. Most of them are Danes, but I have heard the tongues of +Frisian and Finn and Northumbrian amongst them. We are in evil +case, for slavery is the least we have to fear."</p> +<p>"Nay," said Dalfin; "death is a lesser evil than that."</p> +<p>"A man may make shift to escape from slavery," answered the +other, and both were silent.</p> +<p>Then for a moment I had half a hope that help was at hand for +us, if too late. Round the westward point crept two longships under +their broad, brown sails, making for our haven. But a second glance +told me that they were the ships belonging to this crew. Doubtless, +they had landed the force somewhere along the coast beyond our ken, +and now were coming to see how the raid had fared. The matter was +plain enough to me now.</p> +<p>Half a dozen men came toward us at this time, leaving the rest +to sort the piles of plunder they had brought from the village. I +was glad, in a sort of dull way, that none of it came from the +hall, for at least no one of them might boast that he wore my +father's weapons and war gear. The foremost of these men were a +gray-haired old chief and a young man of about my own age, who was +plainly his son; and I thought it certain that these two were the +leaders of the foe. They were well armed at all points, and richly +clad enough, and I could but think them of gentle birth. The men +who followed them were hard-featured warriors, whose dress and +weapons were strange to me.</p> +<p>We sat still and stared back at them, as they stood before us, +wondering little and caring less, so far as I was concerned, for +what they thought or would say. The old chief ran his eye down our +wretched line, stroking his long beard as if noting our points, +while the young man seemed to have a sort of pity for us written on +his face.</p> +<p>"Well," said the old chief at last, "you have made a good fight, +if foolish. You shall have your chance. Which of you will join +me?"</p> +<p>"Tell us who you are first," said Dalfin; "that is only +fair."</p> +<p>"I am Heidrek the Seafarer, and this is Asbiorn, my son. Mayhap +you have heard of us before."</p> +<p>I had done so. One of the men in our group had fled to us from +Banff a year ago, after just such a raid as this. I heard him groan +as the name was spoken.</p> +<p>Heidrek heard also, and laughed shortly.</p> +<p>"It seems that I am known," he said. "Well, make your choice. +The other choice is death, of course. I can leave no one to say +that I am collecting goods from this shore."</p> +<p>"Kill me, then," said Dalfin, while I made no answer.</p> +<p>Two of our men cried that they would join him, and their bonds +were cut by Heidrek's followers. One of them set himself by my side +and spoke to me at once.</p> +<p>"There are worse things than going on the Viking path, Malcolm, +son of my jarl," he said earnestly. "Blame me not."</p> +<p>I turned my head from him. Maybe I was wrong, but it seemed like +treachery. Yet, after all, save myself there was not one left of +our line, and he was deserting no one. Both these two were single +men.</p> +<p>Young Asbiorn heard the man name me, and he came a pace +nearer.</p> +<p>"So you are the son of the chief here," he said quietly. "What +is your name and rank? Will anyone ransom you?"</p> +<p>"I am the youngest son--I am worth nothing to any man," I +said.</p> +<p>"He is Malcolm, the jarl's best-loved son," said that man of +ours who had asked my pardon. "Maybe his mother's folk will ransom +him. His grandfather is Melbrigda, the Scots jarl over yonder."</p> +<p>He pointed across the hills where the smoke hung among the +heather, and at that old Heidrek laughed, while the men at his +heels chuckled evilly. For some reason of their own, which, maybe, +was not far to seek, they were certain that Melbrigda could find +ransom for no one at this time, if he would. Asbiorn turned to our +guest, seeing, no doubt, that he was not of the house carles. The +great gold torque on his neck seemed to shine all the more brightly +by reason of the blackened mail and cloak that half hid it.</p> +<p>"My name?" said Dalfin, with a flash of pride in his gray eyes. +"It is Dalfin, prince of Maghera, in Ireland, of the line of the +Ulster kings. Kill me, and boast that once you slew a prince. No +need to say that I was bound when you did it."</p> +<p>He spoke the Danish of Waterford and Dublin well enough.</p> +<p>Asbiorn flushed, with some sort of manly shame, as I believe, +and even old Heidrek frowned uneasily. To have the deed they +threatened set in all its shame before them was a new thing to +them.</p> +<p>"Let the prince go, chief," I said, seeing this look. "He is a +guest, and if this is some old feud with my father of which I have +not heard, he does not come into it. He is a guest of the +house."</p> +<p>"Faith," answered Heidrek savagely, "he has made it his own +affair. He has been the bane of three of my best men. Aye, I have a +feud here, and with all who dwell at ease. I am Heidrek the +Seafarer."</p> +<p>He turned away, and left us with some sign to his men; but +Asbiorn stood still and spoke again to us.</p> +<p>"You bear a Scottish name," he said. "Have you no Scottish kin +besides Melbrigda?"</p> +<p>I shook my head, whereon Dalfin spoke for me.</p> +<p>"Here," he said, "if it is just a matter of ransom, let us both +go; and come to Belfast in a year's time, or six months' time, an +you will. Then my father will pay chief's ransom for the two of us. +My word as a prince on it."</p> +<p>"It is a new thing with us to take ransom, or the word of any +man," answered Asbiorn doubtfully, yet as if the plan seemed good +to him.</p> +<p>One of the men who followed him broke in on that,</p> +<p>"No use, Asbiorn. We cannot put into any Irish port in safety. +And over there princes are thick as blackberries, and as poor as +the brambles that bear them."</p> +<p>"Aye, and as prickly," said Dalfin. "Have you learned that +also?"</p> +<p>The men laughed. One of them said that the Irishman's Danish +speech was not bad, and that it was a pity--</p> +<p>"So it is," Asbiorn put in hastily. "I will speak to my +father."</p> +<p>The old chief was back with his crew, settling the sharing of +the plunder. His son took him aside, and their talk was long; and, +as it seemed, not altogether peaceful. Soon the men began to gather +round them, and those with us went to hear what was going on. So we +were left alone for a moment.</p> +<p>"Men," I said, "save your lives as this chief bids you. Join him +now, and leave him when you may."</p> +<p>"Do you join him?" said one in answer.</p> +<p>Not I."</p> +<p>"Neither do we. We live or die with you. What else should +courtmen of the jarl's do?"</p> +<p>So said one of our Norsemen; but the eyes of the Scots were on +the bleak hills, and for them the choice was harder, I think. They +had no ties to us but those of common work and life together, and +it was the old land that they must think of leaving. They said +nothing, for until he has made up his mind a Scot will not +answer.</p> +<p>They would have to decide directly, for now Heidrek was coming +back to us. After him were a score or more of his men, and the rest +were loading themselves with the plunder and starting one by one +towards the haven, into which the two ships were just bearing up. +They would be alongside the little wharf by the time the men +reached it. Our own good longship lay there also, and I wondered +what they would do with her. She was too good to burn.</p> +<p>Now Heidrek stood before me and looked at me, glowering, for a +moment.</p> +<p>"Well," he said curtly, "do you join me? Mind you, I would not +give every man the chance, but you and yours are men."</p> +<p>Before I could say aught, and it was on my mind to tell the +pirate what I thought of him, if I spent my last breath in doing +it, the courtman who had spoken with me just now answered for +himself.</p> +<p>"We do what the young jarl does," he said; "we follow him."</p> +<p>"The choice was whether you would follow me or not," answered +Heidrek coldly; "I will have no leader but myself."</p> +<p>Some of his wilder followers cried out now that we were wasting +time, and that an end should be made, while a sword or two were +drawn among them. It was the way in which Heidrek's crew were wont +to deal with captives when they had no hope of ransom from them. +That I and my men should join such a crew was not to be thought of, +if for a moment I had half wondered if I ought to save the lives of +these courtmen of ours by yielding. Both I and they would be +shamed, even as Dalfin had said.</p> +<p>So I made no answer, and Heidrek was turning away with a shrug +of his broad shoulders, while the men were only waiting his word to +end the affair. Then Asbiorn, whose face was white and pitying as +he looked at us, gripped his father by the arm and faced him.</p> +<p>"I will not have it thus," he said hoarsely. "The men are brave +men, and it were shame to slay them. Give them to me."</p> +<p>Heidrek laughed at him in a strange way, but the men yelled and +made a rush at us, sword in hand. Whereon Asbiorn swung his round +shield into place from off his shoulder, and gripped his light axe +and faced them. It was the lightness of that axe which had spared +me; but the men knew, and feared it and the skill of the wielder, +and they shrank back.</p> +<p>"What, again?" said Heidrek. "I thought we had settled that +question. What would you with them?"</p> +<p>"That is to be seen. Let me have them."</p> +<p>"Pay for them, then," shouted one of the men. "They are over and +above your share of plunder."</p> +<p>"Aye," said Asbiorn at once, "I claim them for my share. Have +them down to the new ship, and set them in the forepeak till I need +them."</p> +<p>Then old Heidrek laughed harshly.</p> +<p>"Faith, I thought the lad a fool," he said. "Now I know that he +will not be so short-handed as I thought. Some of you who are his +crew will have an easier time at the oar with these slaves to pull +for you."</p> +<p>The men laughed at that, and I knew that the danger was past. I +minded what our man had said at first, how that one might escape +from slavery. And I think that the nearness of death--though, in +truth, not one of us would have shrunk from the steel that was so +ready--had taught me how good a thing life might be even yet.</p> +<p>Most of the men went away, the matter being settled. Heidrek +went also, without another word to his son, and we were left to +Asbiorn and a few men of his own crew. The young chief smiled a +little as he looked again at us, but even Dalfin could not smile +back again.</p> +<p>"Now," said Asbiorn, "cast off the lashings from their feet, and +let them walk to the ship. See that they all get there, and set a +watch over the place where they are stowed."</p> +<p>"Are we sailing at once?" a man asked.</p> +<p>"Yes, as usual. The chief has some new plan on foot +already."</p> +<p>The end of it was that in a short time we were on board our own +ship, and safely stowed forward, still bound. Heidrek had added her +to his force, and manned her from the other two vessels; but before +we reached the ship I saw that Heidrek's men had piled their slain +into an outhouse, set the fagot stack round it, and fired it to +windward. There was no more honour for their fallen comrades than +that.</p> +<p>So I saw the last of my home in Caithness, and before me was the +life of a slave. They had stripped us of our mail and weapons, of +course, and had handled us roughly, but that might be borne. The +low door of the cramped sail room under the fore deck closed, and +we were in darkness, and then Dalfin set into words the thought of +us all, with a sort of dull groan:</p> +<p>"This morning I woke and thought it good to be alive!"</p> +<p>Almost at once the ship was warped out of the haven, and went to +sea. The last hope I had that the Scots might yet gather and fall +on these pirates left me at that time, and a sort of despair fell +on me. I think I swooned, or slept at that time, for thereafter I +can remember no more until the day was almost spent, and a man came +and opened the low door that he might bring us food--oaten loaves, +and ale in a great jug. Asbiorn stood outside.</p> +<p>"You may as well loose the men," he said carelessly; "we can +mind them well enough."</p> +<p>"More likely to have them out on us in some sort of berserk +rage," said the man, growling. "I ken what I would do in their +place well enough."</p> +<p>Asbiorn stooped and looked in on us. The light was behind him, +and I could not see his face; but he spoke evenly, and not +unkindly.</p> +<p>"Will your men bide quiet if I unbind you all?" he said.</p> +<p>"Aye," I answered. "Why not?"</p> +<p>"Good reason enough why you should," he said.</p> +<p>"Let them loose."</p> +<p>One by one we were unbound, some more men coming forward and +watching us, with their weapons ready, in case we tried to fall on +them. I dare say some old happening of the sort had taught them +caution.</p> +<p>"There are thirty of us on board, mind you," the man who set us +free said, as he gathered the loose cords and went his way. "Better +join us offhand, and make the best of the business."</p> +<p>"Good advice that, maybe," said Dalfin, stretching himself. +"Pass along yon ale pot. I have a mighty thirst on me."</p> +<p>"That is better," said the man, and laughed.</p> +<p>I heard him tell another that the Irishman would come round +first; but Dalfin's foot had warned me that he spoke in no earnest. +Whether my friend had any plan in his mind I could not say, but at +all events there was no use in making our bondage worse than it +might be by sullenness.</p> +<p>It was good to be free from the lashings that had galled us so +sorely, if we were still captives indeed, and had no mind to pass +from the cramped cabin, if one may call the forepeak so much, to +the deck where the foemen sat and made merry with the stores they +had taken from us. The wind was steady and light, and they had +naught to do but rest and eat their supper. Asbiorn steered, and +was alone on the after deck. The two other ships were not to be +seen, and I suppose that they outsailed ours, for she had never +been of the swiftest, though staunch and seaworthy in any weather. +We were heading due north as if we would make the Faroe Islands, +leaving the Orkneys to the starboard.</p> +<p>I wondered if Heidrek had his lair in that far-off spot, whence +we should have not the slightest chance of escape in the days to +come; but I could say nothing to my comrades. Men of the crew sat +just outside the low doorway, with their backs against the +bulkhead, as if set there to overhear what we might say.</p> +<p>I looked among them for those two men of ours who had been ready +to join Heidrek as their one chance of life, but I could not see +them. Perhaps this was no wonder, as it is likely that they were +drafted to the other ships in order to keep them apart from us. It +was certainly the safest thing to do.</p> +<p>Asbiorn himself seemed to have some thought of this sort with +regard to us seven presently. Before sunset, he called some of the +men and bade them bring Dalfin and myself and shut us into the +after cabin, under his own feet, as he sat at the steering oar. Two +of my men were to be left in the fore peak, for they were unhurt +and could be shut in safely, while the other three were set +amidships, with men of the crew round them. These three had some +slight hurts, and a man set about caring for them, roughly but +skilfully enough.</p> +<p>But what I chiefly noticed as we were led aft, was that the ale +was passing freely, and, as I should have thought, too often for +good seamanship. That, however, was not my business, if it did seem +to explain why Asbiorn separated us. Seven desperate men might do +much among a helpless crowd, once they had snatched the arms they +could reach from those who had forgotten to guard them.</p> +<p>The young chief paid no heed to us as we passed into the +darkness of the low cabin. The door was closed and barred after us, +and we were left to our own devices, though in a few minutes some +man on the after deck took off the little square hatch cover which +let the light into the place. It was half full of plunder of all +sorts, and there was barely room, if soft stowage, for us.</p> +<p>"Well," I said to Dalfin, "if we can sleep, let us do so. I know +that every word we speak can be heard on deck."</p> +<p>Whereon he answered me in Erse, and I could understand him well, +for the old tongues of Scot of Ireland and Scot of Caithness are +the same, if ages have wrought some changes in the way of speaking +them here and there.</p> +<p>"Let these Danes make what they can of that," he said. "It will +take a man born to the Gaelic to catch aught of it through yon +hole, if he thinks he understands it in the open."</p> +<p>So in the Erse we spoke for a little while, and it was a +hopeless talk at best. Only we agreed that we would stand by one +another through whatever might come, and that the first chance of +escape was to be taken, be it what it might.</p> +<p>All the while that we talked thus the noise of the men who drank +grew wilder and more foolish. It was a cask of our old heather ale +which they had broached, and that is potent, if to the unwary it +seems harmless enough. Once or twice Asbiorn called to the noisiest +to be still, but they heeded him little.</p> +<p>Soon, however, the noise ceased, and we thought that most of the +men slept. After that was no sound but the wash of the waves, and +the hum of the sail, and the creak of the great steering oar as +Asbiorn met the luff of the ship across the long, smooth sweep of +the waves.</p> +<p>We, too, grew drowsy, for the cabin was close and warm beneath +the sunny decks. All that could be said was said, and so we slept, +if it were but uneasily.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch2" id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: Men Of Three +Kingdoms.</h2> +<p>I was roused before long by a tapping on the deck overhead, +which came now and again as if Asbiorn, who was steering still, was +beating time to some air. So he was, for soon he began to whistle +softly, and then to hum to himself. I will not say that the music +was much; but he sat barely a fathom from the open hatch, and +presently the words he sang caught my ear. They were of no song I +had ever heard, and they seemed to have little meaning in them. I +listened idly, and the next thing was that I knew, with a great +leap of my heart, that what he sang, or pretended to sing, was +meant for myself. It could only be so, for he sang of the Orkney +Isles to the east of us, and of a boat, and of two men who could +win thereto if they dared to try.</p> +<p>"Listen, Dalfin," I said, and my comrade started up eagerly.</p> +<p>Asbiorn heard the movement, and he seemed to lean toward the +hatch.</p> +<p>"Jarl's son," he hummed, "come under the hatch and listen. Is it +in your mind to get away from us?"</p> +<p>I set my head through the little square opening carefully, and +looked round. There was a bale of canvas, plunder from our ship +sheds, across the break of the deck, and I could not be seen by the +men, while Asbiorn was alone at the helm. It was almost as light as +day, with the strange shadowless brightness of our northern June, +when the glow of the sunset never leaves the sky till it blends +with that of sunrise.</p> +<p>"Your boat is towing aft," he said, still singing, as one may +say. "It is shame to keep chiefs in thralldom thus; and I will not +do it. Now, I am going forward, and you can drop overboard and take +her. The men are asleep, and will not wake."</p> +<p>"What of my men?" I said.</p> +<p>"Glad enough they will be that you have escaped," he said. "They +will be all the more ready to do so themselves when they have the +chance. They shall have such as I can give them. Leave them to me, +for they fought and stood by you well."</p> +<p>"Asbiorn," I said then, "maybe I shall be able to thank you for +this someday."</p> +<p>"Mayhap," he answered lightly. "Now, no more words; but take +your chance as it comes. The sail is in the boat, and the course is +due east hence. If the wind holds you should make the land by to +morrow at noon. Hasten, for your time is short. There is a watch +forward, and they may see you."</p> +<p>He lashed the helm with a deft turn or two, and stood for a +moment with his eyes on the sail. The ship was heading due north, +and Heidrek's two ships were some three miles ahead of us. This +ship of ours was slow, if stout and weatherly. Then he went forward +quickly, never looking behind him.</p> +<p>"Have you heard, Dalfin?" I asked; and he answered that he had, +and that he was ready.</p> +<p>"Follow me closely," I said. "I am going to cast off the boat's +painter and go over the side with it in my hand. You will be close +on me."</p> +<p>With that I drew myself up through the hatch, and crawled under +cover of the long bale of canvas-- which, doubtless, Asbiorn had +set where it was on purpose--to the cleat, cast off the line, and +swung myself overboard with as little noise as possible. The boat +came up and nearly ran over me; but I had expected that, and was +ready. The ship slipped away from me strangely quickly. Still, +there was no shout from her, and so far all was well. Then came +Dalfin, later than I had expected, for his head was at my heels as +I left the hatchway.</p> +<p>He came slowly over the gunwale on all fours, and let himself go +with a splash, which I thought every man in the ship must have +heard. He fell on his back, with his arms in the air, grasping +somewhat in them, which I thought was some man who tried to hold +him. Yet I had not seen one come aft. Then there seemed to be a +fight in the water where he was, and with that I left the boat to +herself. There was a long, deep swell running, but it did not +break, and I was maybe fourscore yards from him. The boat would +drift after me with the wind, and I swam to his help with all my +might. I could see him as the rollers lifted me on their crests now +and then, and round him the white water flew as he struggled with +somewhat. At that time I saw the tall figure of Asbiorn on the +fast-lessening stern of the ship, and with him was another man. One +of them seemed to come right aft and look over the stern, and then +stooped to the cleat where the painter had been fast. Then both +went to the helm, and bided there. Neither looked into the cabin +hatch, so far as I could tell.</p> +<p>A long, oily roller slipped from under me, and in its hollow I +saw Dalfin. He was learning to swim, with the little four-legged +bench belonging to the helmsman as his support. It had never +entered my mind that the son of a chief could not swim. I cannot +remember when I could not do so, and any one of us would have +thought it shame not to be at home in the water, whether rough or +calm. Nor had he warned me that he could not do so; and therein I +hold was the deed of a brave man. He would not hold me back in any +way, but would give me my chance, and take his own. He had to reach +the bench, too, which was risky, and that, no doubt, had delayed +him. I swam up to him, and he laughed and spluttered.</p> +<p>"Is all going well? Where is the boat?" he gasped.</p> +<p>"Very well," I said. "But why not tell me you could not swim? I +would have hove up the boat alongside for you."</p> +<p>"Aye, and so have been seen," he said. "I saw this bench, +and--"</p> +<p>The sea filled his mouth, and he had to be silent. I saw the +boat coming to us as the wind drifted her, and swam round him, +while he splashed wildly as the bench lifted to the waves. Then I +saw what was amiss, and got it across and under his chest, and he +was happy.</p> +<p>"It is the first time I have ever been out of my depth," he +said. "I shall be happier yet when I am in the boat. Yonder she +comes!"</p> +<p>I turned my head sharply at that, for he was looking north. We +had been running northward dead before the wind when we went +overboard, and any boat thence must needs come from the ship.</p> +<p>Then I saw no boat at all, but only the head of a man who swam +slowly toward us, and into my mind it came that this was one of our +own men who had seen us go, from amidships, and had managed to +follow. So I hailed him, but the answering voice was strange to me. +With a few strokes the swimmer neared us, and I saw that he was a +young man, brown-haired and freckled, with a worn, anxious face, +that had desperation written on it. I had never set eyes on him +before.</p> +<p>"I would fain make a third in this escape," he said, speaking +fair Danish, but slowly, as if unused to it. "I have been a captive +with Heidrek like yourselves, and I saw you go."</p> +<p>"You are no Dane?" I said, being somewhat cautious, as may be +supposed.</p> +<p>"A Saxon of Wessex," he answered. "On my word, I have had no +part in this raid, for I was left with the ships."</p> +<p>"Then you are welcome," I said frankly. It was certain that no +man would do as we had done, save he were in as sore straits.</p> +<p>The black bow of the boat lifted on the waves close to us, and I +swam to her and climbed in over her stern. By this time the ship +was too far off to be dangerous, unless it was thought worthwhile +to come back to pick up the boat, which was unlikely, as it would +have been done at once if at all. Between us, the Saxon and I +managed to get Dalfin into her, and then our new companion +followed. He wore a thrall's dress, and had not so much as a knife +on him. Yet one could see that he bore himself as might a thane, +while his voice was not a thrall's voice.</p> +<p>Now a word or two passed as to whether we should step the mast +and set sail at once, but it seemed safer not to do so. We could +still be made out clearly from the ship if we did.</p> +<p>"I wonder someone has not looked into the cabin yet to see if we +are still there," I said.</p> +<p>"Not likely," answered Dalfin. "I set back the cover on the +hatch before I went for the bench."</p> +<p>"A good thought, too," said I. "Now, what I most hope is that +none of my poor folk will be harmed for this. Mayhap it will be +said that they helped us in some way."</p> +<p>"No," said the Saxon slowly. "They will blame me, and that +matters not at all. But it must have been a mere chance that the +terrible splashing our comrade made was not seen by Asbiorn; for he +went aft, and looked long toward the boat. I heard him say that she +had gone adrift, and that some lubber must have made fast the +painter carelessly. The man who took the helm said that the boat +was not worth putting about for, and that hardly a man of the crew +was fit to haul sheet. Which is true enough."</p> +<p>"Asbiorn saw without doubt," I said. "This escape is his +doing."</p> +<p>"Aye," answered the Saxon, "I can well believe it. He is the +only one of all that crowd who is worth a thought. It is the first +time they have let me sail with him--it is but a chance that I have +done so now. Men get away from him too easily."</p> +<p>"How did you get away now?"</p> +<p>"There was no man awake near me. I had naught to do but roll +over the rail. I dare say Asbiorn saw me also. He would not care, +for he hates to have captives held as slaves on board his +ship."</p> +<p>Dalfin shivered a little. "It is very cold," he said +ruefully.</p> +<p>So it was, for the June nights in the north have still a nip in +the air. I told him that sea water has no harm in it, but at the +same time thought we might as well get out the oars and make what +way we could. Then when we lifted the sail and looked for them, +there were none. Only the short steering oar was there; but the new +pair I had made myself this winter were gone. No doubt the pirates +had put them in their own boat, for they were good. Not that it +seemed to matter much, for so soon as the ship was a mile or two +farther, we could make sail in safety. We could have done little in +the time but warm ourselves. So we had to be content to sit still +while the dark sail drew away, and our clothes dried on us.</p> +<p>"Well," said the Saxon presently, "how you feel, friends, I do +not know; but I want to shout and leap with the joy of being free +again. Nine months I have been a thrall to Heidrek, watched, and +bound betimes, moreover."</p> +<p>He held out his hands, and they were hard with the oar, and +there were yet traces of cords round the strong wrists.</p> +<p>"Tell us how you came into this trouble," I said, "it is likely +that we shall be comrades for a while."</p> +<p>"Easily told," he said. "When I was at home in England, I was +Bertric the ship thane, and had my place in Lyme, in Dorset. I +owned my own ship, and was thane by right therefore, according to +the old laws. Last year I fared to Flanders, where I had done well +before, in the summer. In September I was homeward bound, and met +this Heidrek outside the Scheldt mouth. He took my goods, and +burned my ship, and kept me, because I was likely to be able to +pilot him, knowing all that coast. Oh, aye, we fought him; but he +had two ships to my one, and four to one in men. Asbiorn saved me, +I think, at that time; but I have never had a chance of escape +until tonight. I saw it coming, and was ready. You were but a few +minutes before me. Now I know that I am in luck to find +comrades."</p> +<p>"May it be so," I said, holding out my hand to him.</p> +<p>There was that in the frank way of this Saxon which won me, half +Scot though I am, and therefore prone to be cautious with men. He +took it with a steady grip, and smiled, while Dalfin clapped his +broad shoulder, and hailed him as a friend in adversity.</p> +<p>"We three should do well in the end, if we hold together," +Dalfin said. "But you and I are in less trouble than Malcolm. He +has lost all; while we were both wanderers from home only. My folk +will trouble not at all for me for a year or so, and a shipmaster +may be away as long as he chooses. None will look for you till you +return, I suppose? Well, I came out to find adventures, and on my +word, I am in the way to find them."</p> +<p>"Not a bad beginning," laughed Bertric. "As for me, it is no new +thing that I should be a winter abroad, and my folk have long +ceased to trouble much about me. I am twenty-five, and took to the +sea when I was seventeen. Well, if Heidrek has spoilt this voyage, +we can afford it. Luck has been with me so far. If I win home again +it is but to start fresh with a new ship, or settle down on the old +manors in the way of my forebears."</p> +<p>Now, the remembrance that I had not one who would so much as +think of me took hold of me, for the first time, as these two +talked of their people, and it fell sorely heavily on me. I could +say naught, and turned away from these light-hearted wanderers.</p> +<p>They knew, and left me to myself in all kindness, for there was +no word they could say which would help me. Bertric spoke again to +Dalfin, asking him how it came to pass that he could not swim, +which was as much a wonder to him as it had been to me.</p> +<p>"Yesterday I would have asked you why I should be able," Dalfin +answered lightly, "today I know well enough. But my home in +Maghera, where we of the northern O'Neills have our place and +state, lies inland. Truly, there is the great Lough Neagh, on +which, let me tell you, we have fought the Danes once or twice; but +if there is any swimming to be done for the princes, there are +always henchmen to get wet for them. Never did I dream that a day +would come when there was swimming which no man could do for me. +That is why."</p> +<p>"But it seems that you have ships, if you fought the Danes on +the water?"</p> +<p>"Never a ship! We fell on them in the fishers' coraghs--the skin +boats."</p> +<p>"And beat them?"</p> +<p>"Well, it was not to be expected; but we made them afraid."</p> +<p>Dalfin stood up in the boat unsteadily, and swung his arms to +warm himself. She was a wide and roomy fishing craft, and weatherly +enough, if she did make more leeway than one would wish in a +breeze.</p> +<p>"There is less wind," he said. "It is not so cold."</p> +<p>The long, smooth sea was going down also, or he would not have +kept his footing as he did. I looked up sharply, and met the +Saxon's eye. A calm to come was the last thing we wished.</p> +<p>"Maybe there is a shift of wind coming," Bertric said. "No +reason why we may not make the most of what breeze is left +now."</p> +<p>"It is the merest chance if any man spies us by this time," I +said. "We will risk it."</p> +<p>So we stepped the mast and set sail, heading eastward at once. +We trimmed the boat by putting Dalfin in the bows, while I steered, +and the Saxon sat on the floor aft and tended sheet. I asked him to +steer, but he said the boat was my own, and that I was likely to +get more out of her than a stranger. The sail filled, and the boat +heeled to the steady breeze; and it was good to hear the ripples +wake at the bows, and feel the life come back to her, as it were, +after the idle drifting of the last hour. But there was no doubt +that the wind was failing us little by little.</p> +<p>About sunrise it breezed up again, and cheered us mightily. That +lasted for half an hour, and then the sail flapped against the +mast, and the calm we feared fell. The long swell sank little by +little until we floated on a dead smooth sea, under brightest +sunshine, with the seabirds calling round us. Nor was there the +long line of the Orkney hills to be seen, however dimly, away to +the eastward as we had hoped.</p> +<p>"How will the tide serve us hereabout?" asked Bertric +presently.</p> +<p>"The flood will set in to the eastward in two hours' time," I +answered. "It depends on how we lie on the Orkney coasts whether it +drifts us to the northward or to the southward. We have been set to +the westward all night with the ebb."</p> +<p>"Wind may come with the flood," said he.</p> +<p>And that was the best we could hope for. But I set the steering +oar in the sculling rowlock aft, and did what I could in that way. +At least, it saved some of the westward drift, if it was of very +little use else.</p> +<p>Dalfin curled up in the sun and slept. He had no care for the +possible troubles which were before us, knowing naught of the sea; +but this calm made the Saxon and myself anxious enough.</p> +<p>"After all," I said, "maybe it will only be a matter of hunger +for a day or two."</p> +<p>Bertric smiled, and pointed to the locker under the stern +thwart, on which I was sitting.</p> +<p>"I think I told you that you were but a few minutes before me in +this matter," he said. "Well, when I heard that Asbiorn would take +the boat, I knew my chance had come. So I dropped six of your +barley loaves into her as she lay alongside the wharf, and stowed +them aft when I went to bale out the rain water that was in her. +The men were too much taken up with the plunder to mind what I was +about. I think your little water breaker is full also. It is there, +and I tried it."</p> +<p>"Why, then, that will carry us far enough," I said. "You are a +friend in need in all truth."</p> +<p>"I wrought for myself. I am glad that things have turned out +thus in the end. Now do you sleep, if you can. You shall wake when +need is."</p> +<p>He came aft and took the oar from me, and I was glad to lie down +on the floor boards amidships and rest. And the first thing that I +noted was that the Saxon sculled better than myself, and +wonderfully easily. Then I slept heavily for maybe three hours.</p> +<p>Bertric roused me about that time. The wind had come, and the +sky had clouded over, and the boat was slipping fast through the +water, looking eastward indeed, but the wind headed us too closely +for that to be of much use. It was blowing from the worst quarter +for us, the southeast, and freshening. The boat was fit for little +but running, and at this time I waxed anxious as to what was before +us, for any Caithness man has heard tales of fishers who have been +caught in the southeast winds, and never heard of more.</p> +<p>Now, it would make a long tale to tell of what came thereafter +on the open sea. Bertric would have me sleep now, and I did so, for +I was fairly worn out, and then the weather grew wilder, until we +were driving before a gale, and our hope of making even the +Shetlands was gone.</p> +<p>So we drove for two whole days until we had lost all reckoning, +and the gale blew itself out. But for the skilful handling of the +boat by Bertric, I know we might have been swamped at times in the +following seas, but Dalfin knew naught of the peril. He baled when +it was his turn, cheerfully, and slept be times, so that I envied +him his carelessness and trust in us.</p> +<p>The wind wore round to the northwest at its last and hardest, +and then sank quickly. On the third morning we were in bright +sunshine, and the sea was going down fast, and again we were +heading east, with a half hope of making some landfall in Norway, +if anywhere. At noon we shared the last loaf in just such a calm as +had fallen on us at first; and at last Bertric and I might sleep +again, leaving Dalfin to keep watch. We might be in the track of +vessels from Norway westward and southward, but we could not tell, +and maybe we expected him to see nothing. But it may tell how +wearied we were that we left so untried a landsman to watch for us, +though, indeed, either of us would wake with the least uneasiness +of the boat in a rising wind. So we slept a great sleep, and it was +not until near sunset that Dalfin roused us.</p> +<p>"There is somewhat like a sail on the skyline to the eastward," +he said. "I have watched it this half hour, and it grows bigger +fast. I took it for a bird at first and would not wake you."</p> +<p>That brought us to our feet in a moment, and we looked in the +direction he gave us.</p> +<p>"A sail," said Bertric. "She is bearing right down on us, and +bringing an easterly breeze off shore with her. If only we can hail +her!"</p> +<p>"It is not Heidrek again?" asked Dalfin anxiously.</p> +<p>"No; his sails are brown. Nor does one meet men like him often. +We shall find naught but help from any other, if we may have to +work our passage to their port. That is of no account so long as we +are picked up."</p> +<p>In half an hour the breeze from the eastward reached us, and we +bore up across the course of the coming ship. She came swiftly down +the wind, but was either badly steered, or else was so light that +with her yard squared she ran badly. At times the wind was almost +spilt from out of her sail, and we looked to see her jibe, and then +she would fill again on her true course and hold it a while.</p> +<p>"She is out of the way badly handled," said Bertric, watching +her in some puzzlement. "I only hope that they may know enough to +pick up a boat in a seaway."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch3" id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: The Ship Of Silence.</h2> +<p>Soon we knew that she must be the ship of some great chief, for +her broad sail was striped with red and white, and the sun gleamed +and sparkled from gilding on her high stemhead, and from the gilded +truck of the mast. Then we made out that a carven dragon reared +itself on the stem, while all down the gunwale were hung the round +red and yellow war boards, the shields which are set along the rail +to heighten it when fighting is on hand. We looked to see the men +on watch on the fore deck, but there were none, though, indeed, the +upward sweep of the gunwale might hide them.</p> +<p>Presently she yawed again in that clumsy way which we were +wondering at, and showed us her whole side, pierced for sixteen +oars, and bright with the shields, for a moment, and then she was +back on her course. We could not see the steersman for the sail, in +any case, but we saw no one on deck.</p> +<p>Now we were right across her bows, and within hail of her, and +yet no man had shown himself. Bertric and I lifted our voices +together in a great hail, and then in a second, and third, but +there was no answer. Only she yawed and swung away from us as if +she would pass us, and at that Dalfin cried out, while I paid off +fast to follow her, and again Bertric hailed. Now she was broad off +our bows and to the starboard, an arrow flight from us, and Bertric +and I were staring at her in amazement. She was the most +wonderfully appointed ship in all sea bravery we had ever seen--but +there was no man at the helm, and not a soul on deck.</p> +<p>"They are asleep, or dead," said I; and hailed again and again, +all the while edging down to her, until we were running on the same +course, side by side.</p> +<p>"We must overhaul her somehow," said Bertric, "or we are left. +This is an uncanny affair."</p> +<p>The height of her great square sail told, and little by little +she drew ahead of us. We felt the want of the oars more at this +time than any, and I think that with them we might have overhauled +her at once. Had she been steered, of course she would have left us +astern without hope; but as we chased her now, the unsteady flaws +of the rising breeze, which we could make full use of, rather +hindered her. Now and again, with some little shift, her sail +flapped and she lost her way, and yawed so that we gained on her +fast, while a new hope of success sprang up in our minds. Then the +sail would fill again, and she was away from us.</p> +<p>Once, as the breeze veered a point or two, I thought she must +have jibed, for the clew of the sail almost swung inboard; but it +filled again.</p> +<p>"She cannot jibe," said Bertric. "See, her yard is braced square +for running, and cannot shift. If all holds, she must run till +doomsday thus. Her mast may go in a squall, or one of the braces +may part--but I don't see what else is to stop her."</p> +<p>But the wind was light, and hardly strained the new rigging, +while there was a stout running backstay set up with all care, and +even the main halliard had been led far aft to serve as another. +She was meant to run while she might, and that silent and lonely +ship, passing us on an endless voyage into the great westward +ocean, was as strange and uncanny a sight as a seaman could meet in +a long life. Moreover, though she was in full war trim, she seemed +to have some deck cargo piled amidships, which might be +plunder.</p> +<p>So for an hour or more that chase went on. Once or twice we were +a full half-mile astern of her, and then gained with the chance of +the breeze. Once we might have thrown a line on board her, but had +none to heave. Then she gathered way and fled from us, even as we +thought we had her. It was just as if she knew that we chased her, +and would play with us. We almost lost heart at that time, for it +was sickening.</p> +<p>"The ship is bewitched," said Dalfin, and in truth we agreed +with him.</p> +<p>Why, and by whom, she had been set adrift thus, or what had +befallen her crew, we could not guess. Still, she was our only +hope, and we held on after her again. Neither Bertric nor myself +had the least thought of giving up, for we knew that the chances of +the breeze were all in our favour, so long as it came unsteadily as +now. And always, when it fell, we sculled fiercely and gained on +her, if only a little.</p> +<p>So another half hour passed, with its hopes and disappointments, +and then we were flying down on her with a breeze of our own, when +the end came. The wind shifted and I met it, and that shift did all +for us. It reached the ship, and took the clew of the sail inboard, +shaking and thundering, while the sheets lashed to and fro across +the deck. Then somewhere those sheets jammed and held fast, and as +if the canvas had been flattened in of set purpose, she luffed, +until with a great clap of the sail against the mast, the whole of +her upper canvas was aback, and she was hove to helplessly. Maybe +she was a furlong from us at the moment, and Bertric shouted.</p> +<p>"We have her," I cried, "if only all holds!"</p> +<p>"She will gather stern way directly," said Bertric, with set +teeth. "Then she will fall off again, and the sheets will get +adrift."</p> +<p>We flew down on her, but we had been tricked so often before +that we hardly dared to hope. Now we were close to her bows, and we +heard the great yard creaking and straining, and the dull flapping +of the loose canvas of both tack and clew which had blown inboard. +The ship lurched and staggered under the uneasy strain, but the +tackle held, and we had her. Bertric went to our halliards and +lowered the sail as I luffed alongside, and then Dalfin had gripped +the rail between two of the shining shields. There was no sea +beyond a harmless ripple as yet, and we dropped aft to where a +cleat was set for the boats on her quarter, and made fast.</p> +<p>Then as we looked at one another, there came to me as it were a +breath from my lost home in far-off Caithness, for a whiff of peat +smoke hung round us and was gone so quickly that I thought it +almost fancy. But Dalfin had smelt it also.</p> +<p>"There is a fire alight on board," he said. "I smelt the smoke. +That means food, and someone on board after all."</p> +<p>With that he shouted, but there was no answer. It would have +been a relief to me if some ship's dog had flown out and barked at +us; but all was silent, and that was uncanny here in the open sea, +and on such a ship.</p> +<p>"Well," said Bertric, "crew or no, we must go on board. No use +in waiting."</p> +<p>He swung himself up from the boat over the high gunwale, and +then gave me a hand, and together we hauled up Dalfin, and so stood +and stared at all we saw in wonder.</p> +<p>Everything was in perfect trim, and the ship was fitted as if +for a long cruise. She had two handsome boats, with carven gunwales +and stem and stern posts set on their chocks side by side +amidships, with their sails and oars in them. Under the gunwales on +either board were lashed the ship's oars, and with them two carved +gangway planks which seemed never to have been used. Every line and +rope's end was coiled down snugly, and every trace of shore litter +had been cleared from the white decks as if she had been a week at +least at sea, though we knew, from her course, that she could not +be more than a few hours out from the Norway coast. We had guessed +that she might have sailed at dawn.</p> +<p>But we wondered not so much at the trim of the ship, though that +puzzled us; just aft of the mast, and set against its foot, was the +pile we had taken for deck cargo, and the like of it I had never +seen. There had been built of heavy pine timbers, whose ends butted +against either gunwale below, and rose to a ridge pole above, a +pent house, as it were, which stood at the ridge some six feet high +from the deck, and was about two fathoms long. Its end was closed +with timbers also, and against this end, and round, and partly over +the roof, had been piled fagots of brushwood, so that it was almost +covered. Either from haste, or else loosened by the movement of the +ship, one or two of these fagots had not found a place with the +rest, but lay on the deck by the boats. As if to keep the pile +steady, on either side had been set a handsomely carved sledge, and +on the pile at the end was a light wagon, also carved, and with +bright bronze fittings. The wheels had been taken off and set +inside it. Under the piles showed a barrel or two, which it was +plain were tar barrels.</p> +<p>"Firewood for a long sea passage," I said. "And sledges and +wagon for a land journey at its end. One would say that the ship +was flitting a whole family to Iceland--the new land to which men +go today."</p> +<p>"Aye, I have heard of that land, and of families who go there," +said Bertric. "That seems to explain some things, but not why the +ship is adrift."</p> +<p>"What will be in the house yonder?" asked Dalfin.</p> +<p>"Maybe it was built for the women of the family," I said.</p> +<p>Now, this was so likely that for the moment the wonder passed. +We had to tend ship while the breeze held off if we would do +anything with her presently. She was not of the largest build, but +both Bertric and I knew that it would be all that we three could +do, one of us being a landsman moreover, to handle her if it came +on to blow at all freshly.</p> +<p>Now, I would not have it thought that we three castaways were +much in the mind to puzzle over the ship which we had gained, +almost against hope. It was enough for us to rejoice in the feel of +firm planks under our feet once more, and to find naught terrible, +but promise of all we needed, while the strain of the longboat +voyage with its ever-present peril was over. Dalfin broke that +first short silence.</p> +<p>"I am desperately hungry," he said. "Surely there will be food +on board?"</p> +<p>The breeze freshened up again, and the sail flattened against +the mast with a clap, and the ship quivered. It was naught to us, +but it made the landsman start and look upward as if expecting to +see somewhat carried away, while I laughed at him.</p> +<p>"Work first and food afterward," said Bertric. "We must tend +ship while wind is little, if at all. Why, we are not more than +half starved yet, for barley bread stands by one nobly."</p> +<p>"Give me somewhat to do, and maybe I shall forget the hunger," +Dalfin answered ruefully. "Which of you two is to be captain?"</p> +<p>"Bertric," I said at once. "That is his place by all right."</p> +<p>"It is an old trade of mine," the Saxon said quietly "Well, it +is to be seen if I can justify my sayings of myself."</p> +<p>The sun had set by the time we boarded the ship, but we had not +noticed it in the bright twilight. The short northern night would +be no darker than now until the sunrising, for we were close on +midsummer, and there was every sign of settled fair weather after +the gale. Even now the last breeze was dying away, leaving the sea +bright and unruffled under the glow in the northwest sky. It was +only to be hoped that presently some summer breeze might suffer us +to lay our course southward or eastward, toward the land where we +might find haven and help.</p> +<p>Now Bertric set us to work, and we had little or no trouble, for +the breeze fell altogether very quickly. The sheet had fouled the +great cleat which was bolted to the deck beams amidships aft for +the backstay, and that was easily cleared. Then we swung the yard +fore and aft, Dalfin hauling as he was bidden, with fixed intent to +haul till further orders, which was all we needed from him. Then +Bertric would have two reefs taken in, for we could not tell what +weather we might meet, or for how long we might have to stay on +board without help. The foot of the sail was wet, as with heavy +rain.</p> +<p>"We can take no chances," he said. "Yet it is likely that we +shall have a ship or two in chase of us shortly. It is a wonder to +me that we have seen none yet. But word will go along the coast of +what has happened. It is not the first time that a +carelessly-moored vessel has got adrift in a calm, and found a +breeze for herself, while her sail was hoisted to dry in the +sun."</p> +<p>Now, all we had to do was to carry forward the tack and set it +up for reaching, and to do that we had to climb over the fagots at +the foot of the penthouse, and the gunwale end of the timbers they +rested on, the run of the deck being blocked altogether by the +pile. Seeing that when the ship was to be put about the square sail +had to be lowered, brought aft round the mast and rehoisted on the +other board, the unhandiness of the thing was terribly +unseamanlike. Bertric and I grumbled and wondered at it the while +we worked, only hoping that by some stroke of luck we might be able +to reach a haven without having to shift the sail. It was to the +starboard of the mast now, which would serve us well if the wind +came from east or north, as was most likely.</p> +<p>Maybe that was an hour's work, and we had done all we might. By +that time the breeze had altogether gone, and the ship floated idly +on still, bright water, with the hush of the night round us. There +was time to tow her head round when we knew whence the morning wind +would blow.</p> +<p>Bertric coiled down the fall of the tack purchase, and nodded to +Dalfin. "Food now, if there is to be any," he said. "What is in yon +kettle?"</p> +<p>Now that we were forward we had seen that against this end of +the penthouse no fagots had been piled. The red and white striped +awnings of the decks were set there, carefully rolled up round +their carved supports, and they rested on a stout sea bedstead, +such as might be carried on board for the chief to whom the ship +belonged. Two more chests stood at the head and foot of this +bedstead, and they were carved, as indeed was the bed. It was plain +that all the gear on board belonged to some great house.</p> +<p>But six or eight feet forward of these things, and in the midst +of a clear space of deck, was a shallow square box full of sand, +and on that was set the covered kettle of which our comrade spoke. +The sandbox was that on which a fire might be lighted at sea if +need were, but none had been used on it as yet. Hard by were two +casks lashed to ringbolts on deck, one of which was covered, and +the other had a spigot in it. They held oatcake in one, and water +in the other, as perhaps one might have expected, here where the +men of the crew would gather forward. And the kettle was full of +boiled meat, which was maybe the most welcome sight to us that we +could have looked on. For, if we had managed to forget it, we were +famished.</p> +<p>So then and there we made a royal meal, asking not at all what +the meat might be, only knowing that it was good, thanks to the +unknown hands which had made it ready. There was enough in that +great sea cauldron for two more such meals as this, and the oatcake +barrel was full. We had no fear of hunger again for a time, and if +there was no more to be found by the time this store was ended, we +should surely have found haven or help in some way, most likely by +the coming of some ship in search with the morning at latest.</p> +<p>Now, as I sat on the deck and ate, once and again came to me +that sharp smell of peat smoke, and at last I spoke of it, asking +if the others had not smelt it.</p> +<p>"I smell somewhat strange to me," said Bertric. "It is a +pleasant smell enough. What is amiss with it?"</p> +<p>"What, do your folk in England use no peat?" said Dalfin in +surprise. "Why, we should hardly know how to make a fire without +it. It is peat smoke you smell."</p> +<p>"Why, then, there must be fire somewhere!" said Bertric, leaping +up.</p> +<p>"Smouldering peat, certainly," I said, rising with him. "Under +yon fagots is the only place I can think of as possible--or under +the deck planking."</p> +<p>We went to the penthouse, and climbed on the piles of fagots on +the port side. When we trimmed sail afresh we had hauled it along +the starboard, and had at least smelt nothing of the smoke there. +But now we set to work and hove the fagots overboard, setting the +handsome sledge from off them forward out of the way. The peat +smoke grew stronger as we lowered the pile, and at last a little +cloud of blue smoke came up to us.</p> +<p>"No hurry," said I to Bertric, who was anxious, "there is no +wind to fan the turfs into flame. It can but smoulder slowly."</p> +<p>"It is here," cried Dalfin, lifting a fagot whose under side was +scorched and blackened, though more by heat and smoke than +flame.</p> +<p>Under that was a bushel or so of peat, the midst of which was +but a black hollow, round the sides of which the fire glowed red, +only waiting for the wind to fan it into life. The turfs blazed a +little in the draught as we cast them overboard quickly. Then we +sent all the fagots on that side after them.</p> +<p>"This is no chance," I said. "There may be more yet. We must get +all this lumber cleared."</p> +<p>It had been the same on the other side of the pile, but the peat +was cold and dead, not having burned so long. Then we moved the +wagon from the after end of the penthouse, and cleared that. Here +again was peat, and more of it, and it had been lighted, and had +only been out for a short time. Some of the turfs may still have +had fire within them, but we did not wait to see. And all the while +as we worked at this strange task, I wondered what the meaning of +it all was.</p> +<p>The last fagot went overboard, and Bertric rose up and looked at +me. His face was white as with some fear, and he stepped backward +away from the penthouse aft.</p> +<p>"Comrades," he said, "why did they want to burn this ship? She +is not burnt, only because as she ran in the light breeze there was +no wind to set the peat aflame. They meant her to burn when she was +in the open sea--when the spark they set in the turf should have +had time to grow to flame, and fire the brushwood. Look at those +two tar barrels set handy."</p> +<p>"Aye," I said, for all this had been growing on me. "They meant +her to run far from shore before her rigging went. That is why the +halliards have been brought aft, out of the way of the flame."</p> +<p>"And why the sail was wet," said Dalfin. "And maybe why we are +not chased."</p> +<p>"It comes into my mind," said Bertric slowly, "that there has +been pestilence on board, and that they would rid themselves of +it."</p> +<p>But I hardly noted what he said. There had come to me, of a +sudden, the memory of old tales of the ways of my Norse +forefathers, and the certainty of what that penthouse might hold +flashed on me. Many a time I had heard how in long ago days men +would set the body of their dead chief afloat in his favourite +ship, with all his treasure and war gear, and all else that a chief +might need in Asgard; and so light his balefire on board, and let +him pass to a sea grave beyond the ken of men in strange +magnificence. For we of the old faith hold that what a man buries +in life, or takes with him to the grave in death, is his to enjoy +in the hall of Odin when he comes thither. It was the ancient way, +and a wonderful one--the way of the Asir with the dead Baldur.</p> +<p>Yet I had ever been told that the custom was long past, and that +such a sea and fire burial was unheard of now. It was only the +finding of the half-dead fire which minded me of it; for that which +we had thought of a family flitting across the seas to Iceland--the +sail, wet with the thunder rain of yesterday, spread to dry, and +then the coming over the hills of the cast wind suddenly, setting +the carelessly-moored ship adrift from some westward-looking haven, +where lay no other craft which could follow her, had been quite +enough to account for the wandering vessel.</p> +<p>Now I knew that only one thing would account for the purposeful +firing of the ship. Yonder lay some mighty chief--and as I thought +of that I clutched Bertric's arm and pointed.</p> +<p>"Not the pestilence, comrade," I said; "but what lies in yonder +penthouse."</p> +<p>"What should be there?" he asked, wondering, for my voice was +unsteady.</p> +<p>"We have boarded the funeral ship of some chief," I said. "He +lies shut in that chamber with his treasures round him."</p> +<p>"To be burned in his ship at sea," said Bertric quietly. "Well, +a Viking might find a less fitting funeral. Truly, it seems as if +you may be right, and we must needs see if so it is."</p> +<p>Now Dalfin had listened, crossing himself once or twice, and he +nodded.</p> +<p>"I like it not at all," he said; "but we must see what is +yonder, and if Malcolm is right."</p> +<p>It was strange to me that these two showed no fear of him who +doubtless lay there, in the chamber which his men had made for him. +We hold that the one who dares open the grave chamber is the +hardiest of men, running most fearsome risk from the wrath of the +dead hero. For, if aught will bring back the life to a warrior who +has died, it will be that one should set hands on his war gear. And +we hold that the ghost of a man hides near his body for many days, +and therefore see that at hand is set the food that may be needful +if the ghost hungers and will come back for a space to eat. Else he +may wander forth, troll-like and terrible, to seek what he +needs.</p> +<p>I think that it is no wonder if I feared, having been taught all +this. But my comrades were Christians, and on them was no fear of +the quiet dead; but only an awe, and reverence. But of that I knew +naught.</p> +<p>"Why must we open the house?" I said. "It is as if we courted +the wrath of the chief. I have been told of men who would try to +win the treasure from a mound where one was buried, and died with +fear of what he met with there."</p> +<p>"Such an one deserved it," said Bertric quietly; "but we seek no +treasure, nor would rob the dead. No doubt the wrath of Heaven lies +hard on one who does so. Yet all this time we do not know if we are +right or not."</p> +<p>"Let it be," said I.</p> +<p>"I do not think that we should," Dalfin said. "For if you are +right--and you are a Norseman, and know--while it seems about the +only possible reading of what has puzzled us--then we must needs +sail to the Norway shore that the men of the chief may know what +has happened, and either lay him in mound, or see this better +carried out."</p> +<p>"Aye," said Bertric, "Dalfin is right. By chance we have been +set in charge of this ship--maybe not at all by chance--that we may +see honour done at last. Maybe we cannot make for Norway when the +wind comes. If not, we must plan otherwise. Come, I cannot rest +till I know."</p> +<p>But I held him back, making no secret of my fears.</p> +<p>"We shall have to reckon with the wrath of the hero," I said. +"It will be terrible--and we know not what may happen."</p> +<p>At that Dalfin stared at me; but Bertric, who had seen other +lands and knew the ways of men, smiled and set his hand on my +arm.</p> +<p>"I do not fear him," he said. "It is impossible that if a chief +lies there he can be wroth with men who will do naught but honour +him. Think--is there any honour to the mighty dead that he should +wander across the lone sea thus, as we met him?"</p> +<p>I knew that he was right, and did not gainsay him. After all, we +were sure to have looked into that chamber presently, and to have +found what I feared--suddenly and unexpectedly--would have been +worse. So I set my fears aside as best I could, and went forward +with them both to the end of the house, in which we had seen no +sign of door. I thought that perhaps the upright timbers which +closed the end might be loose; but they were nailed to the roof +beam, against which they were set too firmly for us to move them, +and we must look for some axe or other tool.</p> +<p>"One of the chests forward is the ship's carpenter's," said +Dalfin. "I opened it when we sought for food just now."</p> +<p>He slipped round the house and came back with a heavy hammer and +a broad chisel. Bertric took them, and prised away the upper end of +the midmost timber without any trouble. Then he drew it toward him, +and the lower end wrenched free at once, for the nails that held +this building which was to be burnt were not long. And while he did +this, he stood on one side, that he might not pry into the chamber +idly, as it were, while Dalfin and I could see nothing from where +we stood. Only a little peat smoke seemed to come out gently when +the timber had gone.</p> +<p>It did but need that two more timbers should be moved thus, and +there was room enough for a man to pass through. Then Bertric set +down the hammer, and took off his rough sea cap, smiling a little, +yet with grave eyes, and so looked in. Dalfin pressed close to him, +but I stood aside still.</p> +<p>"The place is full of the peat smoke. I can see nothing," Dalfin +said.</p> +<p>"Somewhat white on the floor," said Bertric; "but we block the +light."</p> +<p>He stood aside, and the shadowless brightness shone across the +chamber through the thinning peat smoke. I saw him start a little, +and Dalfin signed himself with his holy sign once or twice. Then I +must look also, almost in spite of myself, and I went forward +quietly.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch4" id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: By Sea And Fire.</h2> +<p>It was even as I thought. There lay in state, as his men had +left him, a wonderful old chief, whose long, white beard swept like +a snowdrift down the crimson cloak in which he was shrouded. They +had set him on just such a low, carved bedstead as that which we +had found outside the house, dressed in his full mail, and helmed, +and with his sword at his side, such a priceless weapon, with +gold-mounted scabbard and jewelled hilt, as men have risked the +terrors of grave mounds to win. His white hand rested on the +pommel, and he was facing forward as if looking toward the far +shore which he was to reach through the flames. But there was +naught terrible in his look, and even my fears passed as I saw the +peacefulness of that last sleep.</p> +<p>The smoke thinned quickly from the chamber; for it had only +soaked into it from the peat against its roughly made walls, over +which the fagots had been piled too heavily and closely for their +purpose. Then we saw that all the deck round the bier was full of +caskets and bales, and that on the far wall hung weapons--swords +and axes, spears, and bows and arrows, and with them mail shirts +and helms and shields, such as the chief himself might wear. And by +the side of the chief, packed carefully in a rushen basket, were +the bowls, one metal, and the rest of black earthenware, which held +the food for the grave, according to our custom. There was a tall +jar of wine also, covered with its little silver drinking cup.</p> +<p>Now we stood for a little while silent, and then Dalfin +spoke.</p> +<p>"What is that yonder?" he asked under his breath, and pointing +to the far end of the chamber. "As it were a heap of mail and +linen."</p> +<p>I could not see what he meant, for I stood on one side, but +Bertric stepped a pace toward him, and looked more closely past the +bier, which almost hid whatever the pile might be. It seemed the +only thing set carelessly, for all else was in perfect order. Then +he started somewhat, and spoke hurriedly.</p> +<p>"As I live," he cried, but so low that the cry was all but +stifled, "it is a girl! Is she also dead or in a swoon?"</p> +<p>He stooped, after a moment's doubt, and went straight into the +place. It was so low at the sides of the bier which he must pass, +that he was almost double until he reached the foot, and stood up +under the ridge. Then he bent, and lifting his burden brought it +out into the open air, carrying it toward the after deck away from +the penthouse.</p> +<p>Then we saw that it was indeed a girl, tall and pale, with long +tresses of yellow-golden hair plaited and bound with some strange +gold-woven blue band, dressed in white, with a beautiful light coat +of mail over the kirtle.</p> +<p>"She is alive," said Bertric, setting her down very gently. +"Either the smoke in that close chamber--or fear--has overcome her. +One of you get water from the cask forward."</p> +<p>I went hastily; but I had to search for somewhat in which to +bring it, and was a few minutes before I found where the ship's +buckets hung under the gunwale right forward. But meanwhile, +Dalfin, with no fears in him, had gone gently to the penthouse and +brought thence the pitcher of wine and the silver bowl, so that +when I came back those two were trying to get some of the wine +between the pale lips, though without much success. Now we bathed +her face with the cool water, and presently the colour began to +come back slowly, though she did not stir.</p> +<p>"We are rough nurses at best," said Bertric; "but we can do +better than this. Let us get the bedstead that is forward, and set +a fold or two of the awning on it for her to rest on. Better than +the hard deck when she comes to herself, and maybe not so +terrifying."</p> +<p>We left Dalfin to tend her, and brought the bedstead and canvas +with all speed, and so lifted her on it. Then Bertric went back +into the house and brought thence a blue cloak which lay where she +had fallen, and covered her with it, for the night was chill now. +It was her own, and with it he brought a light helm made of steel +bands and transparent horn between them, which must have fallen +from her head.</p> +<p>Maybe this maiden was of twenty years, or less, and to me, at +least, who had no sisters as had the others, she seemed beautiful +altogether. I know that had she faced us in life in the entry of +the chamber, clad as she was in her mail and helm, I had been sure +that she was a Valkyria, sent hither by Odin to choose the hero +yonder for his halls.</p> +<p>"She is long in coming round," said Bertric presently. "It may +be as well to close up that chamber before she sees it open, lest +she take us for common robbers, and be terrified."</p> +<p>Dalfin laughed a little.</p> +<p>"Helm and mail and fear should not go together," he said.</p> +<p>"She will wake without thought of what she has tried to be," +answered Bertric. "Get the place closed, Malcolm, anywise."</p> +<p>Now Dalfin and I went together, and set back the timbers in +their places. But they would not bide there properly, and I took up +the hammer we had used to take them down, and drove one or two of +the upper nails again lightly, Dalfin kneeling and holding the ends +below. Whether the sharp click of the iron roused the girl or not I +cannot say, but I had not driven more than three before I heard a +little cry behind me, and turned to see if there was anything +amiss.</p> +<p>The girl was sitting up, and seeming not to heed Bertric at +all--for he was behind her and supporting her--was looking at us +two with wide eyes of fear and wonder. And when I turned of a +sudden, she set her hands together and held them out toward me as +if she prayed, and cried to me:</p> +<p>"Asa Thor! Asa Thor! will you leave me? Is there no place in +Freya's hall--in Gladsheim--for a maiden, if to Asgard she may not +come?"</p> +<p>I had no answer. For the moment I thought that she saw some +vision of the Asir beyond my ken, and then knew that it was indeed +to myself that she spoke. For I stood at the door of the house of +the dead, with Thor's weapon--the hammer--in my hand, and she +wandered in her mind with the weakness that comes after a +swoon.</p> +<p>"Hush, lady, hush," said Bertric in a wonderfully gentle voice. +"It is not Thor whom you see, but only a friend."</p> +<p>But seeing that I made no answer, nor moved, for I was at a loss +altogether, she turned to Dalfin, who still knelt beside me, +watching her in blank amaze. The Norse gods were all but unknown to +him, save perhaps as he had heard their names now and then from the +Irish Danes.</p> +<p>"You must be Freyr, you other of the greeters of the slain. +Speak for me, I pray you, to the hammer bearer, that I may go +whither my grandfather is gone, if so be that I am dead."</p> +<p>"Nay, lady," said Dalfin, with all courtesy, "I do not know him +you mean. I am only Dalfin, Prince of Maghera, of the northern +O'Neills."</p> +<p>Now, at that magnificent "only" I saw Bertric trying to stifle +somewhat like a grin beyond the shoulder of his charge.</p> +<p>"Lady," he said, "we are but mortal men. We are here to help +you, for the ship has not taken fire, and you are safe."</p> +<p>She gave a little gasp and sank back on the roll of canvas we +had set for a pillow, and her eyes closed. I put back the last +timber hastily, and came aft, getting out of sight behind the +bedstead, being in no wise willing to be hailed as Thor again. As +for Dalfin, he poured out another cup of the wine and gave it to +Bertric, who had signed to him for it.</p> +<p>"She will be herself directly," he said sagely. "Who was it that +she took me for?"</p> +<p>"Only a heathen god, and a worthy one," answered the Saxon, +setting the cup to the lips of the girl, and making her drink some +of its contents slowly. "Neither you nor Malcolm will ever be held +quite so highly again. Make the most of it."</p> +<p>I think that he meant the lady to hear him speak thus +cheerfully, and it is certain that she did so. A little wan smile +flitted across her face, and then she flushed red, and opened her +eyes. Her first glance fell on the penthouse, and she shuddered +somewhat. Then she sat up and looked round for us, seeing Bertric +for the first time, as he stood at the head of the rough couch.</p> +<p>"Forgive me, friends," she said quietly. "I think I was not +quite myself. I must have been in a long swoon. There was smoke +also rising round me when last I knew anything."</p> +<p>Now she slipped from the bedstead and set her feet on the deck, +facing us. I saw her look pass quickly over our dress, and minded +that we were in no holiday trim. She saw Bertric in the thrall's +dress, and Dalfin in his torn and scorched and sea-stained green +hunting tunic and leather hose, and myself only in the Norse dress, +and that war torn and grimed with the fight in the hall, which +seemed so many years ago now, and with the long sea struggle that +came thereafter. Yet she did not shrink from us.</p> +<p>"I cannot understand it all," she said. "How comes it that you +are here, and thus? You seem as men who have fought, and are hardly +yet restored after the weariness of fight."</p> +<p>"We have fought, lady, and have fared ill. We were captives and +have escaped; and as we fled by sea we fell in with this ship when +at our wits' end."</p> +<p>So I answered, for my comrades looked at me. The fight was mine, +so to speak.</p> +<p>"It seems well for me," she said, smiling somewhat sadly. "I had +no thought but to be burnt. Now I have escaped that. Tell me how it +may have been."</p> +<p>I did so, wondering all the time how she came to be in that +terrible place, for she spoke of escape. That she would tell us in +her own time, no doubt.</p> +<p>"What can be done now?" she asked, speaking to us as to known +friends, very bravely.</p> +<p>If she had doubts of us, she hid them. Perhaps that we owned to +being escaped captives explained much to her--else she had surely +wondered that the tattered Dalfin claimed to be a prince. Yet he +was princely, both in look and bearing, as he rose up and made +himself known, with a bow which none but a courtier could have +compassed.</p> +<p>"Bertric is shipmaster," I said; "he will answer."</p> +<p>"The ship is yours, lady, and we can but serve you," he +answered. "Now, it depends on the wind when it comes with dawn, as +no doubt it will, what course we can take, for we are too few to +work the ship rightly. We had thought of trying to make the Norway +shore at the nearest point we could reach, and so setting the ship, +and the hero who lies in her, in the hands of those who will do him +the honour that he needs at the last."</p> +<p>At that, to our great surprise, she shook her head.</p> +<p>"That you cannot do; at least, you may not go back to the land +whence he came. Hall and town may be in the hands of our worst foe, +else I had not been here."</p> +<p>"We cannot be sure of making your haven in any case. We should +have sought such haven as we might, had we been alone."</p> +<p>"And you thought nothing of the treasure, which will be surely +taken from you?"</p> +<p>"We had not thought of it, lady. We have been on board the ship +but three hours or so. What thought might have come to us I cannot +say. But it is not ours, and we could not rob the dead."</p> +<p>He said that quite simply, and as the very truth, which must be +to us as a matter of honour.</p> +<p>"Tell me who you are," she said. "The prince I know already. +Dalfin, I think it was, an Irish name."</p> +<p>Dalfin bowed again, well pleased. Then he took on himself to +make us known in turn, as gravely as if in his father's court.</p> +<p>"This is my host, Malcolm, son of the Norse Jarl of Caithness, +who has unfortunately succeeded his brave father after a gallant +fight, in which I was honoured in taking part. This is Bertric the +Thane, of Lyme, in England, a shipmaster of long standing. He +joined us when we two escaped from Heidrek, who calls himself the +Seafarer, and held us captive after burning out my host and his +folk."</p> +<p>"Heidrek the Seafarer!" she said, with a sharp sigh, looking up +in wonder at us. "When was it that he did this harm to you?"</p> +<p>"It was three days ago," I answered. "He fell on us at dawn, and +by noon we were at sea with him as captives. That same night we +escaped, thanks to the young chief, Asbiorn."</p> +<p>"Then he came straightway from your home and fell on mine," she +said gravely. "Surely the wrath of the Asir will fall on Heidrek +ere long, if, indeed, the Asir care aught what a warrior does of +wrong."</p> +<p>"Has he burnt you out also, lady?" asked Dalfin.</p> +<p>"That I doubt," she answered shortly. "But it was with his help +that I myself was set afloat to be burned."</p> +<p>Then her strength seemed to give way at last as the fullness of +her trouble came to her, and she turned from us and sank down +sideways on the bed where she sat, and wept silently. It was hard +for us to stand and see this; but we were helpless, not at all +knowing what we could do. I suppose that we could have done +nothing, in truth; but it seemed as if we ought to have been of +some help in word, at least.</p> +<p>At last she ceased, and sat up again, trying to smile.</p> +<p>"Yesterday, I had thought myself far from such foolishness as +this," she said. "Today, I know that this mail and helm of mine and +the sword that lies yonder in the chamber where you found me are +not fitting for me. They are an idle boast and empty. I am only a +weak woman--and alone."</p> +<p>Almost was she to breaking down again, but she was brave. And +then Bertric spoke for the three of us.</p> +<p>"Lady," he said, "we are homeless wanderers, but we would not +have you think yourself altogether alone so long as we can plan for +you. Mayhap we can do no more, but, at least, we shall see. I +cannot think that all hope is lost. See, we have the ship, and it +is high summer. Not one of us can be worse off than we have been of +late, and we may win to comfort once more."</p> +<p>Thereat she looked at the three of us, and rose up and stretched +her hands toward us, as in greeting.</p> +<p>"I will trust you," she said. "I will think of you as friends +and brothers in trouble, and in enmity to Heidrek the evildoer. It +must be that you three have wrought loyally together through the +long storm, and you can never be aught but friends thereafter, for +you have tried one another. Let me be as the fourth of you without +favour."</p> +<p>"Lady," said Dalfin, "I have sisters at home, and they were wont +to share all the sport of myself and my brothers, even as you say, +as of our number without favour. But always the sisters had the +favoured place, because we willed it, and should be unhappy if it +were otherwise. There were some favours which they held as their +unspoken right.</p> +<p>"Is not that so in your land, Bertric the Thane, and in yours, +friend Malcolm the Jarl?"</p> +<p>Truly this Dalfin knew how to set things in the right way, for +even I, who had no sisters, was not left out of that answer. So we +both said that he was right, and she knew well what we meant, and +was content. Moreover, by naming our titles once again, though they +were barren enough here in all truth, he told her that it was on +our honour to help her.</p> +<p>"I am more than content," she said softly. "I am no longer +friendless. Now I will tell you what befell me, and then you shall +plan what you may, not in anywise thinking too much of me, but for +all four of us."</p> +<p>She set the blue cloak round her as if chill, and was silent, +thinking for a few minutes. Bertric and I leant on the gunwale +close by, and Dalfin set himself on the deck near us. And all the +while she spoke, Bertric was glancing eastward across the still +water for the first sign of the breeze we longed for. I know now +that on him was a dread lest it should bring with it the brown +sails of Heidrek's two ships; but he did not show it. It was likely +that men would have watched for the smoke of the burning ship, and +that when they did not see it, would put out to search, guessing +what had happened.</p> +<p>"Yonder lies my grandfather," the lady said presently. "He was a +king in the old days before Harald made himself the one ruler in +the land who should so call himself. But he cared not at all for +the name, so that he held his own place among his own people, and +therefore let it be, for he was a friend of Harald's and helped him +to the one throne. Whereby we have lived in peace till just now, +when the old chief grew feeble. Then came my far cousin, Arnkel, +and would take first place, for my father, the old man's son, was +dead. That my grandfather would not suffer. He would have me rule, +for I should not be the first woman who had done so in his little +realm. One of my ancestresses fought as a shield maiden--as I +thought myself until today--in the great Bravalla fight long ago. +It is her mail which I have on now. Arnkel pretended to agree to +this, being crafty. It pleased the chief, and deceived me--till +yesterday. Then at last I knew that he did but wait for the death +of my grandfather, Thorwald, and then would get rid of me and my +claims. So Thorwald died, and we would set him in his ship and +build a mound over her in all honour. But to do that must sail her +from up the long fjord, where we have our place, to a low shore +which lies open to the sea near its mouth, for with us is no place +where we may find such a spot as we needed. A little village of +ours is there on the coast, at which we might beach and draw up the +ship; and so we made all ready, even as you see it now, save for +closing the chamber, and sailed thither after the storm had passed, +in the bright night. There we beached the ship, with the rollers +under her, while the people made ready the place for the mound.</p> +<p>"Then suddenly, from over the near hills came Heidrek and his +men, and fell on us as the folk worked. I sat on the deck here +alone at that time, clad thus for the last rites, and saw the +warriors swarm out of a little valley on my folk, and rose up to go +to them with my arms. Then came Arnkel on board in haste, and bade +me shelter in the chamber. The ship was to be set afloat lest the +fight should go against us. But I would not go."</p> +<p>There she stopped, and a look of remembered terror crossed her +face.</p> +<p>"He had two men with him; and all the rest--our courtmen and the +freemen who loved me, as I think--were running to the fight. So +they made no more ado, but carried me thither, bound me that I +might not cry out, and then set up the timbers hastily and fastened +them. So I must lie helpless and hear what went on. They went +ashore, and soon the ship groaned and creaked over the rollers, but +stopped before she was afloat. Men came then and cast things on +board, which were the fagots and the peat for firing; but I could +not cry out, for my head was too closely muffled. I think you would +say that I was gagged. The noise of the fight went on, and seemed +to come nearer. Then the ship took the water. I heard men leap on +board her, and the sail was hoisted. One cried that the chief would +have a fitting funeral after all, Heidrek or no Heidrek; and +another said that the treasure Heidrek sought would be lost to him. +I heard the creak of the yard, and I felt the ship swing to the +wind, and then the men went over the side, and there was silence. +Only from the shore after a little space came a great cry, 'Skoal +to King Thorwald, and farewell!' and with that the war horns blew +fiercely, and the battle cry rang again. Then came the terrible +stifling smoke, and I knew that Arnkel had thus rid himself of +me.</p> +<p>"Presently I freed myself from the gag and the bonds, and tried +to beat down the end of the house, but I could not. I took an axe +from the wall, feeling for it in the darkness, but I waxed faint +and breathless, and the roof is low and I could not use it. I mind +that I set it back; and that is all until I woke here to see, as I +thought, Thor with his hammer and Freyr beside him, and so--"</p> +<p>That was all; and it was enough. Only Dalfin had one question to +ask.</p> +<p>"I wonder this evil Arnkel parted with the treasure so +lightly."</p> +<p>"My folk would not have let him lay hands on it in any case," +she answered plainly. "And they would keep it from Heidrek."</p> +<p>"That is how the men of Heidrek fell on us," I said. "He must +have landed his men beyond your sight, but not far off."</p> +<p>"There were two ships seen passing north in the storm," she +said. "They will have been his, and he must have berthed them in +some near fjord. There he would hear of this that was to be, and of +the treasure which the old king took with him to his grave."</p> +<p>Then Bertric said thoughtfully enough:</p> +<p>"It may well be that the fight has gone hardly for Heidrek, else +I think that he would have put off to follow the ship before this. +After all, it may be that we can sail back to your fjord and tell +this tale to your folk, and so make an end of Arnkel and his +misdeeds. Now, lady--for as yet we do not know your name--we will +rig the forward awning for you, and there you shall sleep. Here is +this bed, and if there is aught else--"</p> +<p>"My name is Gerda," she answered, smiling. "I forgot that you +could not know it. Yes, I am weary, and what you will do is most +kind. See, there is one chest there which I would have with me. It +holds the gear that was my grandmother's, and I may surely use it +in my need. I had never to ask my grandsire for aught but he would +give it me."</p> +<p>We had all ready in very little time, and there we left her, and +she smiled at us and thanked us again, and so let fall the awning +curtains and was gone. Then we three went aft and sat down and +looked at one another. We had a new care thrust on us, and a heavy +one.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch5" id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: Vision And Pursuit.</h2> +<p>Bertric walked backward and forward, as a seaman ever will, +across the deck, whistling softly to himself, and looking +eastward.</p> +<p>"Once," he said, as if thinking aloud, "I was foolish enough to +buy a bag full of wind from a Finn. He said that it depended on how +much I let out what sort of breeze I had. When he was out of my +reach, I found that he had not told me from which quarter the wind +would come. So I hove the thing overboard. Now I wish I had it. Any +wind is better than this doubt of what may come."</p> +<p>"Aye," I said. "We may be blown back into the arms of old +Heidrek. What say you to taking one of these boats, or fitting out +our own with their oars, and so trying to make the coast? Even +Heidrek would pay no heed to a boat."</p> +<p>"We may have to do that yet," answered my friend. "Heidrek is +not coming, or he would have sought this ship under oars at once. +That Arnkel must have beaten him soundly--is that likely?"</p> +<p>"I think so," I said. "Every warrior would be in his war gear at +that funeral, and it would be a full gathering of the king's folk. +Now, I wonder how Arnkel explained the making away of the lady to +her people."</p> +<p>"One may think of many lies he could tell. Men do not heed what +goes on behind them when a fight is on hand. He will say that she +fled, or that Heidrek's men took her--as the fight may go. They +will search for her, in the first case, and presently think her +lost for good."</p> +<p>"If there is one thing which I should like more than another," +said Dalfin, "it would be to see Arnkel's face when we take back +the lady."</p> +<p>"So we may--but not yet. We must know where Heidrek is. And we +have to wait for wind. Eh, well! We had better sleep. I will take +first watch."</p> +<p>"No, Bertric," I said; "do you two sleep. I could not if I +tried."</p> +<p>"Why not?" he asked, with a great yawn. "I could sleep anywhere +at this minute, and Dalfin is as bad."</p> +<p>"I think that I could not sleep with yonder chief so near me," I +said frankly.</p> +<p>Dalfin laughed, though Bertric did not; but without more ado, +they took the sail from the nearest boat and rolled themselves +under it on the after deck. They were asleep in a moment, knowing +that I would call them with the first sign of wind, if it came +before my watch was ended. It wanted about an hour to midnight at +this time, and the red glow of the sun in the sky was flooding the +north.</p> +<p>Now for a long while I paced the deck, thinking of all that had +happened in these few days. Heavy things they were, but the +heaviest were those of the summer morning when Heidrek came, so +that beside those terrors what else had passed was as nothing. And +I passed through them all again, as it were, and hardened myself to +bear them.</p> +<p>I have said little or nothing of my folk, and I needed not to do +so. They were gone, and from henceforth I was alone. What had been +was no more for me. Even the little Norse village in Caithness, +which had been my home, was destroyed, so far as I was concerned, +for the Scots would have stepped into our place, if it was worth +having after the fire and sword had been there. I could never +regain it. Only, there were some things which I owed to my father, +and no man could take them from me while I lived. Skill in arms I +had from his teaching, and such seamanship as a man of +two-and-twenty may have learned in short cruises; woodcraft, too, +and the many other things which the son of a jarl should know. And +with these, health and strength, and a little Scots coolness, +maybe; for I could see that if aught was to be won, I had only +myself to look to for the winning.</p> +<p>So I, in the weird twilight that had fallen now with midnight, +thought and tried to foresee what should be in the days to come, +and could plan nothing. Only I knew that now, for the time at +least, I and these two friends who slept had the lady yonder to +care for before ourselves.</p> +<p>I tired of the short walk to and fro presently, and I think that +at last I forgot my fears of the dead king in my thoughts, for I +went nearer the penthouse, and sat myself on the starboard boat on +the deck. There had risen a light curling mist from the still sea +now, as the air cooled, and it wrapped the ship round with its +white folds, and hid the height of the drooping sails and the +dragon head forward; and presently it seemed to me that out of the +mist came the wraiths of those of whom I thought, and drew near me, +and I had neither fear nor joy of their coming.</p> +<p>My father came and sat himself beside me, and he was as I had +seen him last, dressed in his mail, but with a peace on his face +instead of the war light. My brothers came, and they stood before +us, not smiling, but grave and content. The courtmen whom I had +loved came, and they ranged themselves across the deck, and I +watched them, and felt no wonder that they should be here. Surely +my longings had called them, and they came. So I and they all bided +still for a little while; and then the courtmen raised their +weapons toward me as in salute, and drifted from the deck into the +white mists over the water, and were gone. Then those two mighty +brethren of mine smiled on me, with a still smile, and so they, +too, were gone, and only my father was left; and he, too, rose up, +and stood before me where the brothers had been, and it seemed to +me that he spoke to me.</p> +<p>"Now are you the last of our line, the line which goes back to +Odin, my son; and on you it lies that no dishonour shall fall on +that line, which has never yet been stained. And we trust you. So +be strong, for there are deeds to be done yet in the days that lie +before you."</p> +<p>Then he set his hand on my shoulder, and passed to join those +others, and how I do not know. I was alone.</p> +<p>Then a longing to be with them again came over me, and I rose +and stretched my hands to the place where I had seen them, but +there was nothing--until I turned a little, looking for them; and +then I knew that there was one who would speak to me yet.</p> +<p>The penthouse chamber was open, and it seemed to be filled with +a white light and soft, and in the doorway stood the old king, +beckoning to me, so that, for all my fears, I must needs go to him. +Yet there was naught for me to fear in the look which he turned on +me.</p> +<p>"Friend," he said, "the old sea which I love should be my grave. +See to it that so it shall be. Then shall you do the bidding of the +maiden whom I have loved, my son's daughter, and it shall be well +with you, and with those friends of yours and of mine who sleep +yonder."</p> +<p>Therewith he paused, and his glance went to the things which lay +round the boats and in them--the things which had been set in the +ship for the hero to take to Asgard with him.</p> +<p>"See these things," he said again. "They are hers, and not mine. +There will be a time when she will have need of them. In the place +where I shall be is no need of treasure, as I deemed before I knew. +Nor of sword, or mail, or gear of war at all. And the ways of the +peace of that place are the best."</p> +<p>Then I was alone on the deck, and the tall figure with the long +white beard and hair was no longer before me. The chamber was +closed, even as we had left it, and there was neither sign nor +sound to tell me how that had been wrought. And with that a terror +came on me, and I went backward toward where my comrades lay, +crying to them by name, and my knees failed me, and I fell on the +deck, unknowing if they heard.</p> +<p>Bertric leapt up and saw me falling, and ran to me.</p> +<p>"Poor lad!" he said, "poor lad! Here is he worn out by fighting +and watching, and I would let him watch yet more--I, who am used to +the long hours at sea, and have grown hard in ill usage."</p> +<p>With that he called to Dalfin, who was sitting up sleepily, +being as worn out as myself, and they two hapt me in the sail, and +made me drink of the wine--which I would not have done at all, if I +had rightly known what I was about, considering whence it came--and +presently I came to myself and thanked them, feeling foolish. But +more than that I did not do, for the warmth took hold of me, and I +fell asleep with the words on my lips. Nor did Dalfin need a second +bidding before he lay down again alongside me and slept. And so +Bertric went on watch silently, and I heeded nothing more, till the +sun and the heave of the ship on a long swell that was setting from +the north woke me.</p> +<p>In the sunlight those visions which I had seen seemed as if they +had been but wrought of weariness and weakness, and of the long +thoughts which I had been thinking. I would heed them as little as +I might, therefore, lest they took hold of me again. But I had not +forgotten the words which had been spoken to me, for they were +good, and in no wise fanciful.</p> +<p>I said nothing of what had happened before I cried out and fell. +There was no need, for both Bertric and Dalfin made little of the +matter, saying that it was no wonder, and that maybe I had been +more hurt when I was struck down than I felt at the time--which is +likely enough. However, I had no more trouble in that way. Food and +sleep and the rest on that quiet deck were all that I needed.</p> +<p>"There is wind coming directly, and enough of of it, if not too +much for us," Bertric said. "There has been a gale somewhere far +north, to judge by this swell. Now, I want breakfast before it +comes, but I dare not rouse the lady by getting yon kettle."</p> +<p>As if she had heard him, from beyond the penthouse we saw the +lady herself coming, and we rose up to greet her. Dalfin went +quickly, and helped her over the slanting timbers of the house, +where they blocked the way, and so she came aft to us. She had +taken off her mail, and had put on a warm, blue kirtle over her +white dress, and had made some differences otherwise, which are +past my setting down. But now she looked fresh and bright after the +rest, and the utmost of the trouble had gone from her face.</p> +<p>She greeted us as if we were old friends of her own household, +and that was good. Then she sat on the steersman's bench, which we +set for her, and asked of the sea and wind, and the chances of the +day, brightly. And so at last Bertric said what was nearest to his +mind.</p> +<p>"The wind will be here shortly, lady, and meanwhile we were +thinking of our breakfast. Yesterday we had no scruple in helping +ourselves, but today we are somewhat shy, maybe. But we would bring +the great kettle from forward, if you will break your fast with +us."</p> +<p>"Friend Bertric," she said, laughing, "we made a pact concerning +equal shares of favour and hardship alike. Yet I do not rightly +know--"</p> +<p>She looked grave for a little while, staying her words and +thinking.</p> +<p>"Aye," she said at last, with a smile; "this ship was +provisioned for a long voyage--for the longest of all, indeed. It +seems that for part of the way we have to be her crew. Well, then, +we may take what we will of her stores, and do no wrong. The great +cauldron, too, holds but part of the funeral feast, and that was +mine. Aye, fetch it. There are other things also which may be +found, and you can take of them."</p> +<p>But we had no need to search further, for what we had found last +night was more than enough. We brought the cauldron aft, and some +of the oatcake; and as we ate, first grew and darkened a long blue +line which crossed the sea to the eastward, and then came stray +airs which lifted the loose folds of the sail uselessly.</p> +<p>Bertric and I went forward and got out two of the ship's long +oars, and pulled her head round to the southward. The water dimpled +alongside of us and the sail filled as the breeze came. We laid in +the oars and went aft to the helm; and so in a few minutes the ship +had gathered way, and was heeling a little to the wind, and the +foam gathered round her bows and slid along her side aft as she +headed southward with the wind on her beam.</p> +<p>"Now, Lady Gerda," said Bertric, "we are under way once more, +and the question is, Whither? How far are we from the Norway +coast?"</p> +<p>"I cannot tell," she answered. "It was a little before noon, +however, when the ship was set afloat, as I have told you."</p> +<p>"We overhauled her at sunset," he said thoughtfully. "At that +time she was not doing more than four knots. Maybe we are fifty +miles from shore, for she may have done better than that, though I +doubt it, seeing how wildly she sailed. Now we can hardly beat back +there, for we are too few to work the sail."</p> +<p>"It is as well," she answered sadly. "There wait Arnkel and +Heidrek."</p> +<p>"We think that Arnkel may have made an end of Heidrek's power," +I said.</p> +<p>At that she shook her head.</p> +<p>"Arnkel has had old dealings with Heidrek. He has sailed with +him, I know. It is more likely that after he had done with me, he +made some sort of terms with him, finding out who the attackers +were. We did not know at first, but I heard the men name Heidrek as +the ship was fired."</p> +<p>"Well, then," Bertric said, after a little thought, "we must try +to make the Shetlands or the Orkneys. Malcolm will find us friends +there."</p> +<p>So, that being quite possible if the wind held, and I being sure +of welcome for my father's sake, we set a course for Shetland as +nearly as we could judge it. The ship sailed wonderfully well and +swiftly, even under the shortened canvas, and Bertric was happy as +he steered her. And at his side on the bench sat the Lady Gerda, +silently looking ever eastward toward the home she had lost, while +I and Dalfin well-nigh dozed in the sun on the warm deck amidships +in all content, for things went well with us.</p> +<p>Presently Gerda rose up and came forward, as if she would go to +her awning, and I went to help her over the timbers again.</p> +<p>"Come forward with me," she said; "I have something I must say +to you."</p> +<p>I followed her, and she went to the gunwale, close to the +penthouse, where she was screened from Dalfin, and leant on it.</p> +<p>"You are of my own folk," she said, "and of the old faith, and +therefore I can tell you what is troubling me. These other two good +friends are of the new faith I have heard of, for I saw them sign +their holy sign ere they ate, and you signed Thor's hammer over the +meat."</p> +<p>"They are Christians," I said; "but I have nothing ill to say of +that faith, for I have known many of them in Scotland. I am Odin's +man."</p> +<p>"I have heard nothing but ill," she said. "I was frightened when +I knew that they were not Odin's men. Will they keep faith with +me?"</p> +<p>"To the last," I answered. "Have no fear of that. It is one +thing which the Christian folk are taught to do before all +else."</p> +<p>"I think that I could not mistrust these two in any case," she +said; "but all this is not what I would speak of, though it came +uppermost. What I am troubling about is this which lies here," and +she set her hand for a moment on the penthouse. "What shall be +done? For now we cannot fire the ship."</p> +<p>"If we make the Shetland Islands," I answered, "there are +Norsemen who will see that all is done rightly. There they will lay +the king in mound as becomes a chief of our land."</p> +<p>"And if not?"</p> +<p>"We might in any case make the Danish shore."</p> +<p>"Where a Norse chief will find no honour. Better that he were +sunk in the sea here. I would that this might be done, if we have +any doubt as to reaching a land where your folk were known."</p> +<p>"It may be done, Lady Gerda," I answered, while into my mind +came the words which the old chief seemed to have spoken to me in +the night. "It may be the best thing in the end. But let us wait. +Shall I speak of this to the others for you?"</p> +<p>"Aye, do so," she said. "What have they thought?--for you three +must have spoken thereof already."</p> +<p>"It has been in the mind of all of us to take the chief back to +some land where he will be honoured. We have spoken of naught else +as yet. I will say that it has seemed to me that the Christian folk +have more care for the honour of the dead than have we."</p> +<p>"That is all I needed to hear," she said simply. "I have feared +lest it had been rather the other way."</p> +<p>Now I looked aft, and saw Bertric staring under his hand astern, +and stepped to the other gunwale to see what it was at which he +looked. But I could make out nothing. The sea was rising a little, +but that was of course as the breeze freshened steadily. There was +no sign of change or of heavier weather to come, and no dark line +along the eastward sea warned me of a coming squall. Yet Bertric +still turned from the helm and looked astern.</p> +<p>"What is it?" asked Gerda. "Go and see, and call me if it is +aught."</p> +<p>So I went aft again, and stood beside Bertric, asking him what +had caught his eye.</p> +<p>"I cannot say for certain," he said; "but it seemed to me that +for a moment somewhat like a sail lifted on the sea's rim off +yonder."</p> +<p>He pointed off the port quarter, and turned to the helm again, +leaving me to see if I could catch sight of what he had seen. Maybe +it was but the dipping wing of a gull.</p> +<p>But it was not that. Presently I also saw the speck he meant, +and it did not disappear again. It was the head of a square, brown +sail, the ship herself to which it belonged being hull down, but +holding the same course as ourselves, or thereabouts, so far as one +could judge as yet. And before long a second hove up from astern +the first.</p> +<p>"They are running a bit freer than we," Bertric said. "They have +a shift of wind astern of them, whereby they are overhauling +us."</p> +<p>"Two brown-sailed ships," said I. "They mind one too much of +Heidrek to be pleasant, else one might welcome the coming of any +honest Norsemen who would help us to do the right."</p> +<p>"Wait, and I will tell you," answered Bertric somewhat grimly. +"I cannot mistake Heidrek's ships once I get a fair sight of +them."</p> +<p>In half an hour or so he did tell me. They were undoubtedly +Heidrek's, and were in chase of us. This ship was not to be +mistaken even from a long distance.</p> +<p>"Heidrek has followed in the track this vessel must needs have +taken, and now supposes that some stray fishers have picked her up +and are trying to get away with her and the treasure. Well, that is +near enough to the truth, too," said Bertric, laughing a short +laugh. "No, let Dalfin and the lady rest in peace until we know if +they outsail us. This is a wonderful little craft, but she needs +her crew on board."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch6" id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: A Sea Queen's +Champions.</h2> +<p>We were sailing with the easterly wind on our beam, and making +maybe six knots on it, with the two reefs down. The full crew of +such a ship as this for such a cruise without any warlike ending to +it would be about twenty, or perhaps a few less. She pulled sixteen +oars a side, and with a war crew on board would muster ninety-six +men--three to an oar--with a few extra hands, as the helmsman and +the chiefs, to make a total of a hundred. Her decks would be +crowded, of course, but she would be down to her bearings, being +built for war cruises, and in a breeze all her men would be sitting +up to windward as shifting ballast, so to speak. It is not likely, +therefore, that we could have done much better had we managed to +shake out the reefs, seeing that the ship was light. Her pebble +ballast had been taken out when she was drawn up for the last time +on shore, and in the hurry it had been needless to replace it.</p> +<p>So the two pirate longships overhauled us fast, and presently +their low, black hulls were plain to us. It was time we did +somewhat if we were not to be taken without an effort to +escape.</p> +<p>"See here," said Bertric suddenly, "I know somewhat too well how +those ships can sail; but I think that this ship would beat them in +a reach to windward. That, of course, would run us in toward the +Norway shore, and I have ever heard that it is as dangerous as any. +I do not know it, but the Lady Gerda may do so. If the worst came +to the worst, it is in my mind that we might take to the boat and +let the ship go her own way, if she is beyond our handling when we +make the shore."</p> +<p>"If we can sight land, it is possible that we may be sighted +also," said I. "It seems our only chance. I will call Gerda."</p> +<p>Bertric nodded, and I went forward and called her accordingly, +rousing Dalfin, who slumbered in the sun under the lee of the boats +amidships, as I passed him.</p> +<p>Gerda came quickly from her awning as she heard me, and saw the +two ships at once. They were then some eight miles astern of us, +and she looked at me with an unspoken question.</p> +<p>"They are Heidrek's ships," I said. "We have to try one last +chance of outsailing them."</p> +<p>"Anything rather than that we should fall into such hands," she +said at once.</p> +<p>Now Bertric told her what seemed to be our one plan, and she +answered that she was well content to be guided by us. Neither she +nor we knew rightly where we were, nor how far it might be to the +coast. But she did know that everywhere that shore was belted by +rocky islands, and sea-washed skerries.</p> +<p>"You may be able to steer into safety between them," she said. +"You may split the ship on some half-sunk rock not far from the +land, and so we ourselves may be saved in the boat. I think that is +the best--for so may come a sea grave for my grandfather--and no +enemy's hand shall touch him or his."</p> +<p>Then said Bertric, with set teeth, "If we may not outsail +Heidrek, it will be my part to sink one of his ships with our own, +if it may be done."</p> +<p>"Aye," she said. "Do so."</p> +<p>Therein I was altogether with them, and Dalfin smiled a strange +smile in assent.</p> +<p>"You would steer this ship against the other?" he asked. "Then I +suppose that over the bows here might go on board that other a man +with an axe, and smite one blow or two before he is ended. It will +be well enough if so."</p> +<p>"You shall have your chance," said I. "Maybe I will help."</p> +<p>Now we said no more. Bertric luffed, and we flattened in the +sheet, Gerda hauling with us, laughing, and saying that it was not +for the first time. Then Bertric's face cleared, for the ship went +to windward like a swallow, her length helping her in spite of her +lightness. We had to cut adrift our boat at this time, as she would +hinder us. We had no more need of her.</p> +<p>Heidrek altered his course at once, sailing a point or two more +free than we, either, as Bertric thought, because he could lie no +closer to the wind, or else meaning to edge down on us. And, he +being so far to windward, for a time it seemed as if he neared us +fast.</p> +<p>In two hours we knew that we outsailed him, close hauled. Little +by little we gained to windward, until he was three miles astern of +us and losing still more rapidly, as he went to leeward. He could +not look up to the wind any closer. One of his ships, indeed, was +astern and to leeward of the other, so that if that one only had +had to be counted with, we were safe.</p> +<p>Then he took to his oars, and Bertric and I knew that the worst +was yet to come, as we saw the sun flash from the long row of +rising and falling blades across the miles of sea.</p> +<p>"Some of them will be mighty tired yet before they overhaul us," +I said. "A stern chase is a long chase."</p> +<p>Now I began to look restlessly for some sign of the high land of +the Norway shore, but there was naught to be seen. Only to eastward +the sky was dull and grayish, as it were with the loss of light in +the sky over hill and forest. And Heidrek was gaining on us +steadily if very slowly. We were very silent at this time.</p> +<p>Presently Gerda broke the silence.</p> +<p>"Friend Bertric," she said in a still voice, "how long have +we?"</p> +<p>He glanced back at the ships, and answered her, after a moment's +thought.</p> +<p>"Two hours--or maybe three, if the men who row tire--that is if +the wind holds. If it freshens, we may beat them yet."</p> +<p>"I hear that you doubt that last," she said. "Now, is it still +in your minds to die rather than fall into the hands of yon +men?"</p> +<p>"Lady," said I, "we three would have no care for ourselves. We +have to think of you."</p> +<p>"I will die, sooner," she answered, with set lips.</p> +<p>"Then," said Bertric simply, "it shall be as I have said. We +will ram the pirate ship and sink with her."</p> +<p>Then Gerda rose up and looked at the three of us, and her face +grew bright.</p> +<p>"Now I have one thing to ask you," she said, "and that is to let +me arm you once more. It is not fitting that you three should fall +and pass to Asgard all unlike warriors--in that thrall-like +gear.</p> +<p>"Come with me, Malcolm, and bring what I shall find for +you."</p> +<p>I followed her until she stayed at the entrance to the +penthouse, and I half feared that she would bid me open and enter +it. In truth, we had almost forgotten what lay there, but now I +could not but remember, and the old dread came back to me. But she +did not do so. She pointed to one of the great chests which had +been stowed between the boats, and bade me open it. I had to tug at +it to bring it forward, for it was heavy, and then threw the lid +back.</p> +<p>It was full of mail, and with the close-knit ring shirts were +helms, and some few short, heavy swords.</p> +<p>"War spoils of the old days before Harald Fairhair," she said. +"When my grandfather had many foes, and knew how to guard himself. +All these would have been rent and spoiled before they were laid in +the ship mound--but at the last there was not time--thus."</p> +<p>Now she called to Dalfin, and he came eagerly, with a cry of +delight on seeing the war gear.</p> +<p>"Lift them, and choose what you will for yourselves and +Bertric," she said. "It will be strange if, among all, you do not +find what will suit you."</p> +<p>Now there was no difficulty in finding suits of the best for the +other two. There were seven in all in the chest, and we set two +aside. Dalfin was tall and slight, and very active, and Bertric was +square and sturdy, and maybe half a head shorter than either of us. +But after the way of my forebears, both Norse and Scottish, I was +somewhat bigger than most men whom I have met, though not so much +in height as in breadth of shoulder. Maybe, however, I was taller +than Dalfin, for I think he was not over six feet.</p> +<p>So it happened that as Dalfin, in all light-heartedness, as if +no enemy was nearer than Ireland, took up suit after suit of the +bright ring mail and stretched them across my shoulders, trying to +fit me, not one of these would do by any means. Gerda stood by us, +watching quietly.</p> +<p>"It does not matter," I said at last. "Let me have a weapon, and +I shall not be the first of us who has fallen unmailed."</p> +<p>"No," said Gerda, "it is my fancy that my champions shall be +well armed. Open the small chest yonder."</p> +<p>I did so, and in that lay a most beautiful byrnie and helm, if +anything better than those we had been choosing from. It was the +only suit here, and Gerda looked wistfully at it.</p> +<p>"Take that one, Malcolm," she said. "It will fit you. It was one +of my father's--and I had a fancy that Thorwald would take it to +him in Asgard, for he lies on the Swedish shore, and it might not +be laid in the mound with him. Now you shall bear it to him, and he +will greet you."</p> +<p>"I am not worthy to wear it," I stammered. "It is too sacred to +you."</p> +<p>"No," she answered. "I ask you to do so, and I think you will +not refuse."</p> +<p>Now I saw in the face of Dalfin that he thought it right that I +should take the mail, and so I did. We went with the three suits +and the helms back to Bertric, and so put them on, Gerda helping +us, and I taking the tiller when it was Bertric's turn. Even in +this little while one could see that Heidrek's leading ship had +gained on us.</p> +<p>It was more than good to be in the mail of a free man and +warrior once more. Dalfin shook himself, as a man will to settle +his byrnie into place, and his eyes shone, and he leapt on the +deck, crying:</p> +<p>"Now am I once more a prince of Maghera, and can look a +foe--aye, and death, in the face joyfully. My thanks, dear lady, +for this honour!"</p> +<p>Then he broke into a wild song in his own tongue, and paced the +deck as if eager for the coming of Heidrek, and the promised crash +of the meeting ships. And as suddenly he stopped, and looked at his +hands.</p> +<p>"Faith," he said, "I thought the song went amiss. It is the song +of the swinging swords--and never a sword have I--nor either of +us."</p> +<p>Gerda laughed at him. It seemed that the pleasure of her +champions, as she called us, in the war gear pleased her.</p> +<p>"Swords you shall have," she said at once. "I did but wait."</p> +<p>"For what, lady?" asked Dalfin.</p> +<p>She smiled and reddened somewhat, looking down on the deck.</p> +<p>"One can hardly be mistaken as to whether a man is used to war +gear," she said. "Now I see you three--prince, jarl, and thane--as +I might have known you to be at first. Forgive me for the little +doubt."</p> +<p>Seeing what sort of scarecrows we must have been, we did not +wonder at all that she had doubted. And, after all, not every day +are three men of rank of different lands to be found adrift in an +open boat, simply as it had come about in our case.</p> +<p>"It would have been a wonder if you had not doubted," said +Bertric. "We have naught to forgive, and, indeed, have held +ourselves honoured that you took our words as you did. In all +truth, I do feel myself again in mail, and so must Malcolm."</p> +<p>I did, and said so. There are thoughts knit up in the steel +ringwork which are good for a man.</p> +<p>"The swords are in yon chamber," Gerda said quickly, not being +very willing, mayhap, to speak more in this wise. "I will ask +Malcolm, for he is a Norseman, to come and choose them."</p> +<p>That was the last thing I wished, but would not say so. Without +a word I went forward with her to the penthouse, and took down the +three loose timbers again. The dim chamber seemed very still, and +across its dimness the shafts of sunlight--which came through the +chinks in the rough timbering of walls and roofs--shifted and +glanced as if alive, as the ship swayed. One golden ray lit on the +still face of the old king, and it was almost as if he smiled as we +stood in the doorway. Gerda saw it, and spoke softly, stepping to +the side of the bier.</p> +<p>"It shall please you to arm these warriors who will seek +Valhalla with you, my grandfather. You were wont to arm the friends +who would be ready to fall at your side."</p> +<p>A wave lifted the ship and swung her, and the shaft of light +swayed across the chamber, sparkling on the arms which hung from +the timbers. It lit up the hilt of a gold-runed sword for a moment, +and then was gone.</p> +<p>"That is for you, Malcolm the Jarl," Gerda said. "Take it. Then +choose for the others."</p> +<p>Then I unhelmed and stooped and went into the chamber, and took +down the sword which the sunbeam had shown me. It hung from its own +baldric with an axe and a round shield. Gerda bade me take the +shield also, and I did so. Now I could see well enough to choose +for the others, for the dimness was but the change from the +sunshine outside on deck. I took a lighter weapon for Dalfin, and a +heavy, short sword for Bertric, and with them shields. No long +choice was needed, for not one of the weapons but was of the best. +So I turned, and came forth from the chamber, and gave the weapons +to Gerda, while I closed it once more. I think she bade the king +farewell at that time.</p> +<p>"You have my father's sword also," she said to me softly. "I +think that if you have but a little time to wear these things which +he loved, you will not dishonour them."</p> +<p>She gave me no time to say more, and I do not know what I could +have answered, save that I hoped that I might be worthy. Little +chance of much fighting were we likely to have--and yet there was +just a hope that we might fall in a ring of foes on the deck of the +pirate.</p> +<p>Gerda buckled on those weapons for us. And then Dalfin must end +his song, and it was good to see and hear him, if only he and +myself understood the words. But Heidrek crept up to us all the +time, if we forgot him for the moment under the spell of the wild +song.</p> +<p>The clear voice ceased, for the song was ended. A dimness crept +across the decks, and the sail shivered and filled again. Bertric +looked up at the sky and out to windward, and his face changed.</p> +<p>"What is it?" asked Gerda anxiously.</p> +<p>"Running into a fog bank," he said. "Look ahead."</p> +<p>One could not see it. Only it was as if the ring of sea to +windward had of a sudden grown smaller. Heidrek was not a mile +astern of us, and still his ships were in bright sunshine. Even as +we watched them, a grayness fell on them, and then they grew +dim.</p> +<p>Then the fog closed in on us, and swallowed us up, and drifted +across the decks so thickly that we could barely see from gunwale +to gunwale, damp, and chilling. Still, the wind did not fail us, +hurrying the fog before it.</p> +<p>"We must hold on until we know if this is but a bank of fog, or +if it is everywhere," Bertric said. "What say you, Malcolm?"</p> +<p>I thought a while, knowing the cold sea fogs of the north pretty +well.</p> +<p>"Heidrek will be in it by this time," I said. "Fog bank or more, +I would about ship and run back past him with the wind. If it is a +bank, we shall go with it, and he must lose us. If it is more, we +can get on our southward course in it shortly, and if he sights us +again, he will have all his work to catch us, for his men will be +tired of rowing."</p> +<p>"What if the fog lifts directly?"</p> +<p>"We shall be little worse off than now--and we shall be heading +down on Heidrek before he knows it."</p> +<p>"Aye," he answered, "with way enough on us to sink him offhand, +and maybe take this ship clear through his. Get to the sheets, you +and Dalfin, and we will chance it."</p> +<p>Bertric luffed, and we hauled the tack amidships. Then he paid +off to the wind, and we slacked off the sheet with the help of a +turn of its fall round the great cleat of the backstay. The wash of +the waves round the bows ceased, and there was only the little hiss +of the water as the sea broke alongside of us. It always seems very +silent for a little while when one puts about for a run after +beating to windward.</p> +<p>"Listen," said Bertric under his breath, "we shall hear Heidrek +directly on the starboard bow somewhere. Pray Heaven he has not +changed his course, or we shall hit him! He will not have luffed +any more, for certain."</p> +<p>"Suppose he thinks that we have tried some such trick as this?" +said Dalfin.</p> +<p>Bertric shook his head.</p> +<p>"He thinks we shall go on as we steered, making for the Norway +shore. It is likely that he will think that we may have paid off a +bit, for the sake of speed. Even if he did think we were likely to +do this, what could he do? He cannot tell, and to put about and run +on the chance would be to give away his advantage if we had held on +after all. Listen!"</p> +<p>"I hear him," said Gerda, who was leaning on the gunwale with +parted lips, intent on catching any sound.</p> +<p>The sound she had heard came nearer and nearer as we slid +silently through the water into the blinding fog. It was like a +dull rumble at first, and then as a trampling, until the roll and +click of the long, steadily pulled oars was plain to us. The ship +was passing us, and not more than an arrow flight from us. It +seemed almost impossible that we should not see her.</p> +<p>Suddenly, there came a sharp whistle, and the roll of the oars +ceased. Gerda started away from the gunwale and looked at us, and +Dalfin set his hand on his sword hilt. It was just as if they had +spied us, and I half expected to see the tall stemhead of the ship +come towering through the thickness over our rail. There was +nothing to tell us how fast we were going through the water, and we +seemed still. I saw Bertric smiling.</p> +<p>"Shift of rowers," he said in a whisper, and Gerda's pale face +brightened. Then I heard Heidrek rating someone, and I heard, too, +the tramp and rattle of the men who left and came to the oars; but +by the time the steady pull began again we had passed the ship by a +long way, and lost the sound almost as soon as it came. Then there +was silence once more, and the strain was past. Our course would +take us clear of the other ship by a mile or more.</p> +<p>So we held on for half an hour, and the fog grew no thinner. +Overhead, the sun tried to shine through it, but we could not see +him, and still the wind drifted us and the fog together, and the +decks grew wet and the air chill with the damp which clung round +us.</p> +<p>Gerda sat very still for a long time after the last sounds were +heard. But at last she rose up and shivered.</p> +<p>"Let me go to my awning," she said unsteadily. "I have seen +three brave men look death in the face, and they have not +flinched--I will never wear mail or sword again."</p> +<p>Then she fled forward, and something held us back from so much +as helping her to cross that barrier. We knew that she was near to +breaking down, and no wonder.</p> +<p>There fell an uneasy silence on us when she was within the +shelter of the awning and its folds closed after her. Dalfin broke +it at last.</p> +<p>"Well," he said, "I suppose that you two seamen know which way +you are steering in the fog--but it passes me to know how."</p> +<p>Bertric and I laughed, and were glad of the excuse to do so. We +told him that we steered by the wind, which had not changed. But +now we had only one course before us. We must needs head south and +try to make the Shetlands. Eastward we might not sail for fear of +Heidrek, and westward lay the open ocean, Still, we held on for +half an hour, and then, still shrouded in the white folds of the +fog, headed south as nearly as we might judge.</p> +<p>In an hour the wind fell. The fog darkened round us as the sun +wore to the westward, and the sea went down until only the long +ocean swell was left, lifting the ship easily and slowly without +breaking round her. There was naught to be done; but, at least +Heidrek could not find us.</p> +<p>"There may be days to come like this," Bertric said, with a sort +of groan. "What is to be planned for him who lies yonder?"</p> +<p>Now, I told them what Gerda had said to me, and I could see that +Bertric was relieved to hear her thought of a sea burial.</p> +<p>"I had thought of the same," he said at once. "It is not fitting +that here the old warrior should be drifted to and fro, well nigh +at the mercy of the wind, with the chances of a lee shore or of +folk who make prey of hapless seafarers presently. A sea burial +such as many a good man of our kin has found will be best. I could +ask no more for myself."</p> +<p>"And what of the treasure?" I asked. "Shall that go with +him?"</p> +<p>"It is Gerda's, and she must say," he answered. "Yet she will +need it."</p> +<p>Then Dalfin said:</p> +<p>"It will be hard to tell her so, but she must not part with it. +It stands between her and want, if it may be saved for her. Yet, if +it was the will of the old king that it should be set in his grave, +I do not know how we can persuade her to keep it. He is not here to +say that he does not need it; for he has learnt that now."</p> +<p>I glanced at the penthouse with the thought of that strange +vision of mine. I could not tell my comrades of it, but I thought +that, if need was, I might tell Gerda presently. I said in answer +to Dalfin that he was right, and that we must set the matter thus +before Gerda.</p> +<p>"The sooner the better," said Bertric. "Do you go and speak with +her. We must not let the night pass without this being done, as I +think"</p> +<h2><a name="Ch7" id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: The Treasure Of The +King.</h2> +<p>Gerda heard me coming, and met me at the same spot where we had +first spoken of this matter. She saw that I had come to tell her +what we had said thereof.</p> +<p>"What of the others?" she asked anxiously.</p> +<p>"They have spoken in all thought for you, even as I knew they +would," I answered. "We are at one in thinking that the sea grave +is most fitting."</p> +<p>She asked me why, as if to satisfy some doubts which she yet +had, and I must needs tell her therefore what our own dangers were, +though I made as light of them as I could. I told of the perils of +a lee shore to this under-manned ship; of the chance of meeting +another ship at any time here on the Norway coast; of crews and of +wreckers who would hold naught sacred; of the chance of our +drifting thus idly for many days in this summer weather--all +chances which were more likely than the quiet coming to the islands +where my father's name was known and honoured enough for us to find +help. From these chances it was best to save the king, who was our +care, and at once. She heard me very bravely to the end.</p> +<p>"So let it be," she said, sighing. "You will suffer the treasure +to go with him?"</p> +<p>"That is as you will, lady," I said; "it is yours. Was it the +wish of Thorwald that it should pass to the mound with him?"</p> +<p>She glanced at me, half proudly and half as in some rebuke.</p> +<p>"Thorwald would ask for naught but his arms," she said. "The +treasure was mine, for he did but hoard to give. I would set him +forth as became Odin's champion. He was no gold lover."</p> +<p>"Should it not be, then, as he would have wished?" I said. "Let +him pass to the depths with his war gear, and so through Aegir's +halls to the place of Odin, as a warrior, and unburdened with the +gold he loved not at all."</p> +<p>She looked sharply at me, and shrank away a little, half turning +from me.</p> +<p>"Is the treasure so dear to you men after all?" she asked +coldly.</p> +<p>That angered me for the moment, and I felt my face flush red, +but I held myself in.</p> +<p>"No," I answered as coldly. "These arms you have given us are +all the treasure we need or could ask. They are a warrior's +treasure, and mayhap we hold them as dear as did Thorwald. What +else may lie in those chests we do not know or care, save only for +one reason."</p> +<p>"What is that?" she asked, glancing at me again as if she knew +that she had spoken unkindly.</p> +<p>"That if it goes into the sea depths it leaves you, Lady Gerda, +helpless. When you were at home, with your folk round you, the +hoarded spoils might be spent in all honour to their winner without +thought of why he had kept them thus. Now, in the power they have +for you lies your comfort, and maybe the regaining of your home. +Doubtless, the king hoarded at last for you, and we cannot see your +wealth pass from you without a word to bid you think twice of what +you do here and as things are."</p> +<p>"Aye," she said bitterly, "I am helpless--beholden to you three +strangers," and she turned away swiftly, going to the gunwale and +leaning her arms and head on it as in a storm of grief.</p> +<p>Hard words indeed those seemed; but I knew well enough that they +were meant in no unkindness. They came from the depths of her utter +loneliness. Only a day or two ago she had been the queen in her +little realm, and now--well, I did not wonder at her. Few women in +her place would have kept the brave heart she did before us, and +this weakness would pass. But it was a long while before she turned +to me again, so that I began to fear that in some way I had set +things too bluntly before her, and wished that Dalfin had been sent +to manage better in his courtly way. Yet, I had only spoken the +truth in the best manner I could. At last she straightened herself, +and looked once more at me. There was the light of a wan smile on +her face, too, though she had been weeping.</p> +<p>"Forgive me, jarl," she said softly. "I have wronged you and +those good friends of ours by my foolish words. Indeed, I hardly +knew what I said, for I was hard pressed with the thoughts of what +had been. I do believe that you three have not a thought of +yourselves in this matter."</p> +<p>She set her hand on my arm pleadingly, and I raised it and +kissed it in answer, having no word at all to say. After all, I do +not know that any was needed.</p> +<p>"Then I am forgiven?" she said more brightly. "Now, tell me what +may be done if I keep the treasure. I must needs hear good +reasons."</p> +<p>Good reasons enough there were, and they needed no long setting +into words. If she had not enough to raise men and so win back her +home from Arnkel, at least there must be sufficient to keep her in +comfort in any land until she could find a passage back to Norway, +and claim guardianship and help from Thorwald's friends. We could +and would help her in either way. She heard me to the end, and then +sighed a little, and said that I was altogether right.</p> +<p>"Whether aught of these plans may come to pass is a matter which +the Norns <a name="Glyph1" href="#Note1" id="Glyph1">{1}</a> have +in their hands," she said. "We shall see. But now I am sure that I +may not lightly part with the treasure as I had meant, though it is +hard for me to forego what I had set my heart on. It is true that +all was hoarded for me--at least since my father died. It is well +that Thorwald never knew the sore need there would be for what he +could set by for me."</p> +<p>Then I tried to tell her that all our wish was to lighten the +trouble as much as we might, but she stayed me, laughing as if well +content.</p> +<p>"Nay; but you shall mind that pact which we made at the first, +neither more nor less."</p> +<p>She signed to me to go to the others and set all in readiness +for what must be done; but as I bowed and turned to go, she stayed +me.</p> +<p>"For us Norse folk," she said, "there is one word needed, +perhaps. I heard my men cry the last farewell to Thorwald as the +ship left the shore. The temple rites were long over. All that was +due to a son of Odin has been done."</p> +<p>Now, it is needless for me to say that I could not tell all that +had passed. All I had to say was that Gerda was content with our +plan, and all three of us were somewhat more easy in our minds. It +had been by no means so certain that she would be so.</p> +<p>Now we made no more delay, but quietly and reverently Bertric +showed us how to make all ready for such a sea burial as he had +many a time seen before. So it was not long before the old king lay +with his feet toward the sea on the fathom of planking which we had +lowered from where it was made to unship for a gangway amidships +for shore-going and the like. We had set him so that it needed but +to raise the inboard end of this planking when the time came that +he should pass from his ship to his last resting in the quiet +water; and he was still in all his arms, with his hands clasped on +the hilt of his sword beneath the shield which covered his breast, +but now shrouded in the new sail of one of his boats in the +seaman's way.</p> +<p>At this time the fog was thinning somewhat, and the low sun +seemed likely to break through it now and then. It was very still +all round us, for there was no sound of ripple at the bows or wash +of water alongside, and the swell which lifted us did not break. +Only there was the little creaking of the yard and the light +beating of the idle sail against the mast as the ship rolled and +swung to the swell. Some little draught of wind, or the send of the +waves, had set her bows to it, and she rode the water like a sea +bird at rest.</p> +<p>Gerda came at a word when all was ready, and stood beside us +with clasped hands. And so for a little time we four stood with a +space between us and the head of that rough sea bier, and over +against us beyond it the open gangway and the heaving, gray water, +which now and then rose slowly and evenly almost to the deck level +and again sank away. It was almost as if, when the end had come, +that we waited for some signal which there was none to give.</p> +<p>What those two of the other faith had said to one another I do +not know; but for a little time they stood with bare, bent heads as +in one accord, and I saw them make their holy sign on their breasts +before they moved. Then Bertric signed to me that I should help him +lift the inboard end of the planking, and we stepped forward +together and bent to do so. Even as my hands touched the wood there +came a sudden rushing, and I felt a new lift of the ship, and into +the open gangway poured the head of a great, still wave, flooding +the deck around our feet, and hiding in its smother of white foam +and green water that which lay before us, so that we must needs +start back hastily. The ship lurched and righted herself, and the +wave was gone. Gone, too, was the old king--without help of ours. +The sea he loved had taken him, drawing him softly to itself with +the ebb of the water from the deck, and covering the place +alongside, where I had feared for Gerda to see the dull splash and +eddy of the end, with a pall of snow-white foam.</p> +<p>For a long moment we stood motionless, half terrified. Neither +before this had any sea come on board since we lowered the gunwale +nor did any come afterward. Gerda clutched my arm, swaying with the +ship, and then she cried in a strange voice:</p> +<p>"It is Aegir! Aegir himself who has taken him!"</p> +<p>That was in my mind also, and no wonder. The happening seemed +plainly beyond the natural. I turned to Gerda, fearing lest she +should be over terrified, and saw her staring with wide eyes into +the mists across that sea grave, wondering; and then of a sudden +she pointed, and cried once more:</p> +<p>"Look! what is yonder? Look!"</p> +<p>Then we all saw what she gazed at. As it were about a ship's +length from us sailed another ship, tall and shadowy and gray, +holding the same course as ourselves, and keeping place with us +exactly, rising and falling over the hills of water as we rose and +fell. And we could see that she had the same high dragon stem and +stern as our ship, and on her decks we could make out forms of men +amidships, dim and misty as the ship herself. Yet though we could +see her thus, in no wise could we make out the sea on which she +rode--so thick was the curling fog everywhere, though the sun was +trying to find a way through it, changing its hue from gray to +pearly white. Now, Bertric started from the stillness which held +us, and hailed the ship loudly.</p> +<p>"Ahoy! what ship is that?"</p> +<p>The hail rang, and seemed to echo strangely in the fog, but +there came no answer. Nor was there any when he hailed again and +for the third time. I thought that the outline of the strange sail +grew more dim at the first cry, and again that it was plainer, for +the mist across the sun drifted, though we could feel no +breeze.</p> +<p>"It is Aegir's ship," whispered Gerda, still clinging to me. +"Thorwald is therein," and she raised her hand as if to wave a +farewell, hardly knowing what she did.</p> +<p>At that, one of the shadowy forms on the strange deck lifted its +arm with the same gesture, and at the same moment. Still no sound +came to us, close as the ship must surely be--so close that we +might have heard even a foot fall on her deck in the stillness that +weighed on us.</p> +<p>Gerda's hand sank to her side, and she swayed against me so that +I had to support her hastily, for she was fainting. I do not know +what my face was like as I saw that ghostly greeting, but Dalfin's +was white and amazed, and he crossed himself, muttering I know not +what prayers.</p> +<p>But for all that I heard what was like a half laugh come from +Bertric, and he went quickly aft to the sternpost and rested his +hand on it for a moment, still watching the ship. And as he went, +one of that ghostly crew went also, and stood as he stood, with +outstretched arm set on the dim sternpost. Then the fog turned +dusky and gray again, and the ship alongside us was gone as it +came, suddenly, and in silence, and Bertric came back to us.</p> +<p>Gerda's faintness was passing, for she was but overwrought, +though she still leaned against me.</p> +<p>"What is it?" she asked. "What does it mean?"</p> +<p>"There is no harm in it, lady," answered Bertric. "I have seen +it once or twice before, and naught came thereof."</p> +<p>"It is the ship of ghosts," said Dalfin. "I have heard tell of +it. It comes from the blessed isles which holy Brendan sought."</p> +<p>"Nay," said Gerda; "it is Aegir's ship, and it came for my +grandsire."</p> +<p>"Maybe," answered Dalfin. "I ken not who Aegir is of whom you +speak. But the ship may indeed have come for Thorwald to take him +to some land, like those isles, beyond our ken."</p> +<p>"Aye, to Valhalla," said Gerda. "Take me to my place now, for I +am weary, and would be alone. I have no fear of aught more."</p> +<p>I helped her forward, and she thanked me, saying that now she +would be at rest in her mind. And, indeed, so were we all, for that +penthouse, and its awesome tenant, had weighed on us more than we +had cared to say. We would clear the decks of it all in the +morning.</p> +<p>All that night long we floated on a windless sea, and the fog +hemmed us round until it began to thin and lift with the first rays +of the rising sun. But the night had no more visions for me, and +with the morning I was fresh and fit for aught, after a great swim +in the still water, and breakfast.</p> +<p>Then we set to work and cleared away the penthouse, stowing its +heavy timbers beneath the deck along the keel, for they would in +some degree take the place of the ballast which the little ship +needed. There was some water in her bilge from the great wave, and +that we baled out easily, but she was well framed and almost new. +It was good to see the run of the decks clear again from that +unhandy barrier.</p> +<p>I think that Gerda waited till all was gone, and we were +wondering how best to stow all the goods which lumbered the deck. +Then she came to us, looking brighter and content, with words of +good morrow in all comradeship, which were pleasant to hear, and so +stood and looked at the things we were busied with.</p> +<p>"I have seen our men take things from below the decks," she +said. "Is it not possible to stow all, or nearly all, there? For it +may be as well that folk whom we may meet with shall not see that +we have these chests on board."</p> +<p>That was good counsel; and though there is not much stowage room +on such a ship as this, it could be done. Still the wind did not +come, and there was time. Far off, toward where the land should be, +the fog still hung in banks, and doubtless Heidrek was still +wrapped in it. Not that we had much fear of him now, though it was +certain that he would not care to lose us without a search.</p> +<p>Now we raised some of the deck planking aft, and found a floor +laid in one place for stowage on either side of the keel. It would +take all we wished to get out of sight from off the deck.</p> +<p>"Now let me show you what is in these chests," Gerda said +brightly. "Then you will know how to set them."</p> +<p>I think she had a sort of sad pleasure in going through these +things. One by one, as we brought them to the open place, she +lifted the lids of the chests, and in them was treasure more than I +had ever heard of. Maybe it was only a small hoard for one who had +been a king in more than name in his time, but there was enough to +make Gerda a rich woman in any land where she might care to make a +home, if only we could save it for her. One chest held bags of +silver coin, stamped with the heads of many kings, and won from +many lands, though most came from the English shores, where the +burgesses of coast towns would pay ransom for their safety when the +longships sailed into their havens with the menace of fire and +sword. In another smaller chest, hardly more than a casket, was +gold--rings and links and chains of the sort with which men trade +by weight, and withal, some coined money from the East and from the +British land.</p> +<p>Jewels there were also, brooches of gold and silver and gilded +bronze, set with gems and bright with enamel, and arm rings and +torques of gold. Women's jewels there were, necklaces and +bracelets, hung with the round golden plates, coin-like, with the +face of Thor stamped on them, and written runes. Two bales there +were also of wondrous stuffs from the looms of eastern lands, gold +inwoven and shining, bought in far-off Gardariki, where the great +fair is, or won from hall and palace in the wars of Harald +Fairhair. And not the least part of the treasure lay in the arms, +which were almost beyond our pricing, so good were they, whether +mail or helm or weapon. Yet none were better than those Gerda had +given us yesterday in our need.</p> +<p>"It is no small treasure which you have made me keep," Gerda +said somewhat sadly, as we set the last of the chests in their +hiding.</p> +<p>"You will find a use for it, dear lady," Dalfin said cheerfully. +"It is a great thing to have somewhat of the sort to fall back +on."</p> +<p>She sighed a little, and turned to a big plain chest which she +had bidden us leave on deck.</p> +<p>"You three fall back on that," she said, laughing. "It is no +part of the treasure, and is here by mistake. Yet I know what it +holds, and you may be glad thereof."</p> +<p>Dalfin threw it open, and laughed also. It was full of the +holiday clothes of some half-dozen of the head courtmen of the old +king; blue and brown jerkins, and white and blue hose, short red +cloaks, and fair linen underwear. They had brought it for the +feasting after the mound was made, and had forgotten it in the +onset of Heidrek. I have seen men of some rank wear no better. +Thorwald's men were in good case.</p> +<p>"You have made new men of us from head to foot," said Dalfin +gleefully. "In very truth we have sore need of change."</p> +<p>Now we went to replace the deck planking, and she bethought +herself.</p> +<p>"Let us keep the little chest with the gold where we can reach +it easily," she said. "Supposing we are wrecked it will be well to +have it at hand."</p> +<p>That was wise, and we set it on deck again. It was not more than +one could carry easily, though heavy, having iron rings at either +end as handles. I took it aft out of the way, and set it by the +steering bench. And then we ended our work, and things were +shipshape once more.</p> +<p>It was very hot as the sun rose higher. There was a feeling of +thunder in the air, and Gerda was glad to seek the shelter of her +awning from the heat and glare from sea and sky. The ship swayed +gently to the dying swell, and the sail flapped idly against the +mast, while ever we looked to see the longships of Heidrek coming +in the offing in search of us.</p> +<p>Once I climbed the mast, and was glad to see no sign of his +sails. Though we must have baffled him for the time, we could not +have sailed far ere the wind failed. Presently, in the shelter of +the boats, we fitted ourselves out afresh from the courtman's +chest, and felt more like ourselves again. We set the mail we +needed no longer for the time in the chest, and that done, longed +for the wind which did not come. It was breathless.</p> +<p>The awning grew stifling, and Gerda left it for our midday meal, +coming to the after deck, and sitting there with us. Presently she +looked at our dress and smiled, jesting a little. Then she set her +hand on the little chest of gold which stood on the deck by her and +opened it.</p> +<p>"I am going to ask you to wear some of these things," she said, +half shyly. "I have a fancy to see you three as you should be, with +the things which belong to your rank on you."</p> +<p>Bertric shook his head at that. "No, lady," he said. "What +need?"</p> +<p>"Maybe I would see my friends as they should be," she answered. +"Maybe I would fain for once give the gifts a queen may give, if +never again. And maybe it is as well that some of these treasures +should be shared among us because we know not what may come."</p> +<p>"Well," said Bertric, laughing, "maybe they will not be so +likely to go overboard without us."</p> +<p>Now, I cannot tell all that was in her mind, but so she would +have it; and as it was true enough that if we were wrecked we were +more likely to save somewhat if it was on us, we let her have her +way. So in the end she chose out the heavy golden bracelets which +Bertric and I should wear, and then asked Dalfin, laughing, what +was the token of the rank of a prince in his land. It was the +torque which Heidrek's men had taken from him, and I told her +so.</p> +<p>Whereon she took from the casket a wonderful, twisted torque, +the like of which I had never seen, for it was not of Norse work, +and gave it to him. He took it and looked at it curiously, and his +face lighted up. It had some strange writings on it, and he read +them. Then he turned to Gerda, and it was plain that somewhat had +pleased him mightily.</p> +<p>"Queen," he said, "this is a greater gift to me than you ken. It +is strange that this torque should come to me here, for there is a +song of it which I have known since I was able to learn aught. It +is the song of its losing."</p> +<p>"Thorwald, my grandfather, won it on the high seas from Danish +Vikings," she answered eagerly. "What is the story?"</p> +<p>"It is the royal torque of our house," he said. "It was lost +when my kinsman, Dubhtach of the Spearshafts, fell at Howth. In the +song are the names of Danish princes who fell ere it was won from +us, and they are not a few. Now your folk have avenged the loss, +and the luck of the O'Neills has come back. And, faith, it was time +it did, for mighty little luck have we had since it went from +us."</p> +<p>Then he bent his knee in princely fashion, and kissed the hand +of the giver, and so set the torque on his neck. It bent easily, +and fastened with hooked ends. Plain enough it was that he felt +that he had recovered a treasure.</p> +<p>"See," said Bertric, "here is wind coming."</p> +<p>There were thunder clouds working up from the north and east, +and a haze was gathering overhead. Soon, in the stillness, the +thunder rumbled across the sea, and the heavy drops of the first +rain fell, bringing with them cold draughts of wind, which filled +the sail for a moment, uselessly, and were gone.</p> +<p>Then across the northern sea grew and spread a line of white +which swept down on us swiftly, and with a roar the squall, which +came before the wall of rain, was on us. Something lifted forward +and fled downwind like a broken-winged red and white bird. Gerda's +awning had gone; and Dalfin shouted. But we could not heed that. We +were wrestling with the helm, for the wind was heavy and unsteady, +and the thunder rolled round us and above us, while the lightning +shot in jagged streaks from cloud to sea incessantly. The rain came +in torrents, whitening the sea; but Gerda stood with her arm round +the high sternpost, with her yellow hair flying and the water +streaming from her, seeming to enjoy the turmoil.</p> +<p>The rain swept past, and the wind fell suddenly, as it had come. +For a few minutes the sail hung and flapped, and then the worst +happened. I heard Bertric cry to us to hold on, and a fresh squall +was on us. It came out of the south as if hurled at us, taking the +sail aback. The forestay parted, and then with a crash and rending +of broken timber the mast went some six feet from the deck, falling +aft and to port, and taking with it half the length of the gunwale +from amidships.</p> +<p>After that crash we stood and looked at one another, each +fearing that there must be some hurt. But there was none. We had +been well aft, and the falling masthead and yard had not reached +us, though it had been too near to be pleasant. Maybe the end of +the yard, as it fell, missed me by a foot or so.</p> +<p>But though Gerda's face was pale, and her eyes wide with the +terror of the wreck, she never screamed or let go her hold of the +sternpost to which she had been clinging. She was a sea king's +daughter.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch8" id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: Storm And Salvage.</h2> +<p>The ship took a heavy list, and some sea broke on board, but +though it was rising fast, there was not yet enough to do much +harm. The floating bights of canvas hove us round broadside to the +run of the waves, and needs must that we cleared away the wreck as +soon as might be.</p> +<p>There were two axes slung at the foot of the mast in case of +such chances as this, and with them we cut the mast adrift from the +shattered gunwale, and got it overboard, so that the ship recovered +herself somewhat. The yard lay half on deck, and I climbed out on +it, and cleared it from the mast without much trouble, cutting away +all the rigging at the masthead, and letting the mast itself go to +leeward as the waves would take it.</p> +<p>After that we had some hard work in getting the sail on board +again, but it was done at last, and by that time the squall was +over, while the wind had flown back to its old quarter--the +northeast--and seemed likely to bide there. Overhead the scud was +flying with more wind than we could feel, and we had cause to be +anxious. The sea would get up, and unless we could set some sort of +sail which would at least serve to keep her head to it, we should +fare badly. Moreover, it was likely enough that the ship was +strained with the wrench of the falling mast.</p> +<p>There was no spare sail on board which we could use in the way +of storm canvas, and the sails of the boat were too small to be of +any use. Nor was there a spar which we could use as mast, save the +yard itself. It must be that or nothing, and time pressed.</p> +<p>I suppose that we might have done better had we the chance, but +what we did now in the haste which the rising sea forced on us, was +to lash the forward end of the yard to the stump of the mast, +without unbending the sail from it. Then we set it up as best we +might with the running rigging, and so had a mightily unhandy +three-cornered sail of doubled canvas. But when we cast off the +lashings which had kept the sail furled while we worked, and +sheeted it home, it brought the ship's head to the wind, and for a +time we rode easily enough.</p> +<p>Then we baled out the water we had shipped, and sought for any +leak there might be. There was none of any account, though the +upper planking of the ship was strained, and the wash of the sea +found its way through the seams now and then. We could keep that +under by baling now and again if it grew no worse.</p> +<p>But in about an hour it was plain that a gale was setting in +from the northeast, and the sea was rising. We must run before it +whether we would or no, and the sooner we put about the better, +crippled as we were. We must go as the gale drove us, and make what +landfall we might, though where that would be we could not tell, +for there was no knowing how far we were from the Norway shore, or +whither we had drifted in the fog.</p> +<p>So we put the ship about, shipping a sea or two as we did so, +and then, with our unhandy canvas full and boomed out as best we +could with two oars lashed together, we fled into the unknown seas +to south and west, well-nigh hopeless, save that of food and water +was plenty.</p> +<p>I have no mind to tell of the next three days. They were alike +in gray discomfort, in the ceaseless wash of the waves that +followed us, and in the fall of the rain. We made terribly heavy +weather of it, though the gale was not enough to have been in any +way perilous for a well-found ship. We had to bale every four hours +or so, and at that time we learned that Gerda knew how to steer. +Very brave and bright was she through it all, and maybe that is the +one pleasant thing to look back on in all that voyage. We rigged +the sail of the boat across the sharp, high gunwales of the stern +as some sort of shelter for her, and she was content.</p> +<p>It was on the morning of the fourth day when we had at last a +sight of land. Right ahead of us, across the tumbling seas, showed +the dim, green tops of mountains, half lost in the drifting rain. +We thought they might be the hills of the western islands of +Scotland, but could not tell, so utterly had we lost all +reckoning.</p> +<p>Whatever the land might be we had to find out presently, for in +no way could we escape from a lee shore. Nor was it long before we +found that here was no island before us, such an we expected, but a +long range of coast, which stretched from east to west, as far as +we could see, in a chain of hills. All I could say for certain was +that these hills were none which I knew, and so could not be those +of the northern Scottish coasts, which I had sailed past many a +time.</p> +<p>There was more sun this morning, for the clouds were breaking. +Once or twice the light fell on the far hilltops, bringing them +close to us, as it were, and then passing. Out to seaward astern of +us it gleamed on the white wavetops, hurried after us, and cheered +us for a time, and so swept on to the land that waited our coming, +with what welcome we could not say. Presently a gleam lit on a +small steady patch of white far astern of us, which did not toss +with the nearer waves, and did not shift along the skyline. It was +the first sail we had seen since we had lost sight of Heidrek, and +it, too, cheered us in a way, for the restless, gray and white sea +was no longer so lonely. Yet we could look for no help from her, +even if she sighted us and was on the same course. We could not +heave to and wait her, and by the time she overhauled us, we were +likely to be somewhat too near the shore for safety.</p> +<p>For the mountains hove up from the sea very fast now. Some +current had us in its grip, setting us shoreward swiftly. Soon we +could see the lower hills along the coast, with sheer, black +cliffs, and a fringe of climbing foam at their feet, which was +disquieting enough as we headed straight for them. We forgot the +other ship in that sight, as we looked in vain for some gap in the +long wall which stretched across our course. Only in one place, +right ahead, the breakers seemed nearer, and as if there might be +shelving shore on which they ran, rather than shattering cliffs on +which they beat. And presently we knew that between us and the +shore lay an island, low and long, rising to a green hill toward +the mainland, but seeming to end to the seaward in a beach which +might have less dangers for us than the foot of the cliffs beyond. +So far as we could make out from the deck, the strait between this +island and the mainland might be two miles wide, or a little +less.</p> +<p>"If only we could get under the lee of that island we were +safe," said Bertric to me. "It would be calm enough to anchor."</p> +<p>"We can but try it," I answered.</p> +<p>And with that we luffed a little, getting the island on our port +bow, but it was of no use. The unhandy canvas set us to leeward, +and, moreover, the water gained quickly as the strained upper +planking was hove down with the new list of the ship. I went to the +open space amidships whence we baled, and watched for a few +minutes, and saw that we could do nothing but run, unless the other +tack would serve us.</p> +<p>That we tried, but now we were too far from the eastern end of +the island, and it was hopeless to try to escape from the +breakers.</p> +<p>"Stem on it must be, and take the chances," said my comrade. "It +does seem as if the water were deep up to the beach, and we may not +fare so badly. Well, there is one good point about these gifts +which Gerda has given us, and that is that we shall have withal to +buy hospitality. There are folk on the island."</p> +<p>"I saw a wisp of smoke a while ago," I said; "but I took it that +it was on the mainland. There is no sign of a house."</p> +<p>"That may lie in some hollow out of the wind," he said. "I am +sure of its being here."</p> +<p>Then I said that if we were to get on shore safely, which by the +look of the beach as we lifted on the waves seemed possible, it +might be better that we were armed.</p> +<p>"Aye, and if not, and we are to be drowned, it were better," he +said grimly. "One would die as a warrior, anywise."</p> +<p>Now, all this while Dalfin sat with Gerda under the shelter of +the boats forward, having stayed there to watch the water in the +hold after we had tried to weather the island. Now and again Dalfin +rose up and slipped into the bilge and baled fiercely, while Gerda +watched the shore and the green hills, which looked so steady above +the tumbling seas, wistfully.</p> +<p>I went to them and told them that we must needs face the end of +the voyage in an hour or so, and that we would arm ourselves in +case the shore folk gave trouble.</p> +<p>"They will do no harm," he said; "but it may be as well."</p> +<p>"One cannot be too sure of that," I answered; but saying no +more, as I would not alarm Gerda with talk of wreckers.</p> +<p>"Bad for them if they do," he said. "We will not leave one alive +to talk of it."</p> +<p>I laughed, for he spoke as if he had a host at his heels.</p> +<p>"No laughing matter," he said, rising up; "but it is not to be +thought of that a prince of Maghera should be harmed in his own +land."</p> +<p>"What is that? Your own land?"</p> +<p>"Of course," he said, staring at me. "Will you tell me that you +two seamen did not know that yonder lies Ireland? Why, that hill +is--"</p> +<p>I cannot mind the names, but he pointed to two or three peaks +which he knew well, and I had to believe him. He said that we were +some way to the westward of a terrible place which he called the +Giant's Causeway, too far off for us to see.</p> +<p>"Why did you not tell us this before?" I asked, as we took the +mail from the courtmen's chest where we had laid it.</p> +<p>"You never asked me, and therefore I supposed you knew," he +answered gaily. "Now, where you suppose you are going to find a +haven I cannot say, but I hope there is one of which I never +heard."</p> +<p>Then I told him of our case, and he listened, unmoved, arming +himself the while. Only, he said that it would be hard to be +drowned with the luck of the O'Neills round his neck, and therefore +did not believe that we should be so. But he knew nothing of the +island, nor whether it was inhabited. He had seen it from the hills +yonder once or twice, when he was hunting, and the chase had led +him to the shore.</p> +<p>I think that in his joy at seeing his own land again he was +going to tell me some story of a hunt on those hills; but I left +him and bade him help Bertric to arm while I took the helm. The +shore was not two miles from us at that time, and Bertric hastened, +whistling a long whistle in answer to me, when I told him Dalfin's +news. Then Gerda came aft and stood by me.</p> +<p>"Is there danger ahead, Malcolm?" she asked very quietly.</p> +<p>"We hope, little; but there is a great deal of risk. We may be +able to beach the ship safely, though she will be of no use +thereafter."</p> +<p>"And if not?"</p> +<p>"She must break up, and all we can hope for is that she will not +be far from shore. We shall have to take to the boat or swim."</p> +<p>"I can swim well," she said. "I have heard you laugh at the +prince because he cannot do so. What of him?"</p> +<p>But those two joined us at this time, and I did not answer, at +least directly. Only, I told Dalfin that he had better get hold of +somewhat, which might stand him in as good stead as had Heidrek's +steersman's bench, in case it was wanted. Whereon he laughed, and +said that the luck of the O'Neills would be all that he needed, +while Bertric went without a word and cut the lashing of the ship's +oars, and set two handy on the after deck.</p> +<p>Now we could see the beach and the white ranks of breakers which +lay between us and it. Bertric looked long as we neared the first +line of them, and counted them, and his face brightened.</p> +<p>"Look at the beach," he said to me. "It is high water, and +spring tide, moreover. There will be water enough for our light +draught. Get Gerda forward, for the sea will break over the stern +the moment we touch the ground."</p> +<p>I looked at him, and he nodded and smiled.</p> +<p>"It will be nothing," he said, knowing what I meant. "One is +sheltered here under this high stern. I shall take no harm. Nay, I +am ship master, and I bid you care for the lady. There are no signs +of rocks."</p> +<p>For I hesitated, not altogether liking not to stand by him at +the last. However, he was right, and I went forward with Gerda, +bidding Dalfin get one of the oars and follow us.</p> +<p>Now, what that beach may have been like in a winter gale I can +only guess. Even now the breakers were terrible enough, as we +watched them from the high bows, though the wind was, as I have +said, not what one would trouble about much in the open sea, in a +well-found ship. But naught save dire necessity would make a seaman +try to beach his ship here at any time, least of all when half a +gale was piling the seas one over the other across the shallows. +Only, we could see that no jagged reef waited us under the +surges.</p> +<p>Gerda stood with her arm round the dragon head which stared +forward. I minded at that moment how I had ever heard that one +should unship the dragon as the shore was neared, lest the gentle +spirits of the land, the Landvaettnir, should be feared. But that +was too late now, and I do not think that I should have troubled +concerning it in any wise, on a foreign coast. The thought came and +went from me, but I set Gerda's cloak round her loosely, so that if +need was it would fall from her at once; and I belted my mail +close, and tried to think how I might save her, if we must take to +the water perforce. I could swim in the mail well enough, and she +could swim also. There might be a chance for her. I feared more for +Dalfin.</p> +<p>Now we flew down on the first line of breakers, lifted on the +crest, half blinded with the foam, and plunged across it. I held my +breath as the bows swooped downward into the hollow of the wave, +fearing to feel the crash of the ship's striking, but she lifted +again to the next roller, while the white foam covered the decks as +the broken gunwale aft lurched amid it. So we passed four great +surges safely, and we were not an arrow flight from land. The water +was deep enough for us so far. Then we rose on the back of the +fifth roller, and it set us far before we overtook its crest and +passed it. The sharp bows leapt through the broken water into the +air, and hung for a long moment over the hollow, until the stern +lifted and they were flung forward and downward. Then came a sharp +grating and a little shock, gone almost as it was felt, but it told +of worse to come, maybe. We had felt the ground.</p> +<p>But the next roller hove us forward swiftly, and we hardly +overran it, so that it carried us safely. Now we were so near the +shore that a stone would have reached it, and but two ranks of +breakers were to be passed. I bade my two companions hold on for +their lives, and set my arm round Gerda before the crash should +come, and we lifted to the first of them, but it was almost as +swift as we, and it carried us onward bravely.</p> +<p>Then the keel grated on the ground, and we lost way. The surge +overtook us and drove us forward, crashing on the stones of the +beach, but hardly striking with any force. The bows lifted, and I +saw the rattling pebbles beneath us as the sea sucked them back. A +great sea rolled in, hissing and roaring round the high stern, and +breaking clear over it and Bertric as he stood at the helm, and it +lifted us once more as if we were but a tangle of seaweed, and +hurled us upward on the stony slope, canting the stern round as it +reached us. We were ashore and safely beached, and the danger was +past. The ship took the ground on her whole length as the wave went +back.</p> +<p>Out of the smother of water and foam astern, as the next wave +broke over the ship, Bertric struggled forward to us, laughing as +he came. The sea ran along the deck knee deep round him as far as +the foot of the mast, but it did not reach us here in the bows, +though the spray flew over us, and our ears were full of the +thunder of the surf on the beach. But the sharp bows were firmly +bedded in the shingle, and we were in no danger of broaching to as +wave after wave hurled itself after us.</p> +<p>Bertric had stayed to take the casket of gold from the place in +the stern where we had set it.</p> +<p>"I had no mind to see the stern go to pieces and take this with +it," he said, setting the load at his feet. "The tide has not +reached its height yet, and she will be roughly handled. We had +best get ashore while we can. We may do it between the +breakers."</p> +<p>I watched the next that came roaring past us. It ran twenty +yards up the shelving beach, and then went back with a rush and +rattle of pebbles, leaving us nearly dry around the bows. We might +have three feet of water to struggle through at first for a few +paces, but that was nothing. Even Gerda could be no wetter than she +was, and the one fear was that one might lose foothold when the +next wave came. It did not take long to decide what we had to do, +therefore.</p> +<p>A wave came in, spent itself in rushing foam, and drew back. I +was over the bows with its first sign of ebb, and dropped into the +water when it seemed well-nigh at its lowest, finding it neck-deep +for the moment. It sank to my waist, and Dalfin was alongside me, +spluttering. Then Bertric helped Gerda over the gunwale, and I took +her in my arms, holding her as high as I could, and turning at once +shoreward. I tried to hurry, but I could not go fast, for the water +sucked me back, while Dalfin waded close behind me. Then I heard +Bertric shout, and I knew what was coming. The knee-deep water +gathered again as the next roller stayed its ebb, swirled and +deepened round me, and then with a sudden rush and thunder the wave +came in, broke, and for a moment I was buried in the head of it, +and driven forward by its weight. I felt Gerda clutch me more +tightly, and Dalfin was thrown against me, gasping, and he steadied +me.</p> +<p>It passed, and I could see again, and struggled on. Then the +outward flow began again, and wrestled with me so that I could not +stem it, and together Dalfin and I, he with one arm round my +shoulder, and in the other hand the oar which he held and used as a +staff, fought against it until it was spent. The rounded pebbles +slipped and rolled under my feet as they were torn back to the sea, +but the worst was past. Up the long slope through the yeasty foam +we went, knee deep, and then ankle deep, ever more swiftly with +every pace, and the next wave broke far behind us, and its swirl of +swift water round my waist only helped me. Through it we climbed to +the dry stretches of the beach, and were safe.</p> +<p>I heard Gerda speak breathless words of thanks as I set her +down, and then I looked round for Bertric. He was two waves behind +us, as one may say, and I was just in time to see a breaker catch +him up, smite his broad shoulders, and send him down on his face +with whirling arms into its hollow, where the foam hid him as it +curled over. He, too, had an oar for support, but it had failed +him, and as he fell I caught the flash of somewhat red slung like a +sack across his back.</p> +<p>Gerda cried out as she saw him disappear, but Dalfin and I +laughed as one will laugh at the like mishap when one is bathing. +That was for the moment only, however, for he did not rise as soon +as he might, and then I knew what had kept him so far behind us, +and what was in the red cloak I had seen. He had stayed to bring +the gold and jewels in their casket, and now their weight was +holding him down. So I went in and reached him through a wave, and +set him on his feet again, gasping, and trying to laugh, and we +went back to shore safely enough. I grumbled at the risk he had +run, but he said that his burden was not so heavy as mine had +been.</p> +<p>For a few minutes we sat on the beach and found our breath +again, Gerda trying to tell us what she felt concerning what we had +done, and then giving up, because, I suppose, she could not find +the right words; which was a relief, for she made too much of it +all. Then the four of us went up the beach to the shelter of the +low, grassy sand hills above it, and there Dalfin turned and faced +us with a courtly bow, saying gravely:</p> +<p>"Welcome to Ireland, Queen Gerda, and you two good comrades. +There would have been a better welcome had we come in less hurry, +but no more hearty one. The luck of the O'Neills has stood us in +good stead."</p> +<p>"If it had not been for the skill of these two friends, it seems +to me that even the luck of the torque had been little," said Gerda +quietly. "You must not forget that."</p> +<p>"It is part of the said luck that they have been here," answered +Dalfin, with his eyes twinkling as he bowed to us. "All praise to +their seamanship."</p> +<p>Then he sat down suddenly as if his knees had given way, and +looked up as if bewildered.</p> +<p>"Is this silly island also afloat?" he asked, "for it feels more +like a ship than any other dry land I was ever on.</p> +<p>"It will do so for a time," I said. "Wait till you lose the +swing of the decks and find your shore legs again."</p> +<p>"Look yonder," Bertric said. "There is the other ship."</p> +<p>We had forgotten her for a time in our own perils. She had +followed our course, though for what reason we could not tell. Now +she had borne up and was heading away westward, some four miles +from shore, and sailing well and swiftly, being a great longship. +Soon a gray wall of rain swept over her and hid her, and when it +cleared in half an hour's time she was beyond our sight.</p> +<p>It seemed pretty certain by this time that there could be no +people on this side of the island at least, or they would have been +here. We climbed to the highest of the sand hills, and looked over +what we could see of the place, but there was no sign of hut or +man. Beyond the sand hills there was a stretch of open moorland, +which rose to the hill across by the strait between us and the +mainland, and both hill and moor were alike green and fresh--or +seemed so to us after the long days at sea. It was not a bad +island, and Dalfin said that there should be fishers here, though +he was in no way certain. All round us the sea birds flitted, +scolding us for our nearness to their nests among the hills and on +the edge of the moor, and they were very tame, as if unused to the +sight of man. I thought we could make out some goats feeding on the +hill side, but that was all. So far as we could judge, the island +may have been a mile long, or less, and a half mile across.</p> +<p>We went back to the lee of the sand hills after seeing that +there was no better shelter at hand. There it seemed warm after the +long days on the open sea, but we were very wet. So we found a +sheltered hollow whence we could look across the beach to the ship, +and there gathered a great pile of driftwood and lit a fire, +starting it with dry grass and the tinder which Bertric kept, +seamanlike, with his flint and steel in his leathern pouch, secure +from even the sea. Then we sat round it and dried ourselves more or +less, while the tide reached its full, left the bare timbers of the +ship's stem standing stark and swept clean of the planking, and +having done its worst, sank swiftly, leaving her dry at its +lowest.</p> +<p>So soon as we could, Bertric and I climbed on board over the +bows, and took what food we could find unspoiled by the water, +ashore.</p> +<p>"Neither of the boats is harmed," we told Gerda. "And presently +we can leave this island for the mainland. And we can save all the +goods we stowed amidships before the tide rises again. But your +good little ship will never sail the seas more."</p> +<p>"It is as well," she answered sadly. "This should have been her +last voyage in another way than this, and her time had come. I do +not think that it had been fitting for her to have carried any +other passenger, after he who lies in the sea depths had done with +her."</p> +<p>Bertric shook his head as one who doubts, being sore at the loss +of a vessel under his command, though there was no blame to him +therein. But I knew what Gerda felt, and thought with her.</p> +<p>By the great fire we made our first meal ashore since we left my +home in Caithness eight long days ago. Nor can I say that it was a +dismal feast by any means, for we had won through the many perils +we had foreseen, and were in safety and unhurt; and young enough, +moreover, to take things lightly as they came, making the best of +them.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch9" id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: The Isle Of Hermits.</h2> +<p>As may be supposed, we were worn out, and the warmth may have +made us drowsy. The roar of the sea, and the singing of the wind in +the stiff grass of the sand hills was in our ears, unnoticed, and +we had made up our minds that there was no man on the island and +that we need fear no meddling with the ship until the sea calmed, +and men might come from the mainland to see what they could take +from the wreck. Presently we ourselves would get what was worth +aught to us and hide it here.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that when from out of the hills round us came +a small, rough brown dog which barked wildly at us, we leapt to our +feet with our hands on our swords as if Heidrek himself had come. +But no man came with him, and suddenly he turned and fled as if he +had heard a call. I was about to follow him to the top of the sand +hill to see what his coming meant, when the pebbles rattled on the +near beach, and I halted. There were sounds as of a bare foot among +them.</p> +<p>Into the little cleft between the dunes, out of which we looked +over the sea, came a short man, dressed in a long, brown robe which +was girt to him with a cord, and had a hood which framed his +pleasant, red face. Black-haired and gray-eyed he was, and his +hands were those of one who works hard in the fields. There was a +carved, black wooden cross on the end of his cord girdle, and a +string of beads hung from it. At his heels was the brown dog, and +in his hand a long, shepherd's crook.</p> +<p>He came carelessly into the opening, looking from side to side +as he walked as if seeking the men he knew must be shipwrecked, and +stayed suddenly when he came on us. His face paled, and he half +started back, as if he was terrified. Then he recovered himself, +looked once more, started anew, and fairly turned and ran, the dog +leaping and barking round him. After him went Dalfin, laughing.</p> +<p>"Father," he cried in his own tongue, "father! Stay--we are +Irish--at least some of us are. I am. We are friends."</p> +<p>The man stopped at that and turned round, and without more ado +Dalfin the Prince unhelmed and bent his knee before him, saying +something which I did not catch. Whereon the man lifted his hand +and made the sign of the Cross over him, repeating some words in a +tongue which was strange to me. I could not catch them.</p> +<p>Dalfin rose up and called to me, and I went toward them, leaving +Gerda and Bertric to wait for what might happen.</p> +<p>"This is Malcolm of Caithness, a good Scot," said he.</p> +<p>"Malcolm, we are in luck again, for it seems that we have fallen +into the hands of some good fathers, which is more than I expected, +for I never heard that there was a monastery here."</p> +<p>I made some answer in the Gaelic, more for the comfort of the +Irish stranger than for the sense of what I spoke. And as he heard +he smiled and did as he had done to Dalfin, signing and saying +words I could not understand. I had no doubt that it was a welcome, +so I bowed, and he smiled at me.</p> +<p>"I was sorely terrified, my sons," he said. "I thought you some +of these heathen Danes--or Norse men, rather, from your arms. But I +pray you do not think that I fled from martyrdom."</p> +<p>"You fled from somewhat, father," said Dalfin dryly; "what was +it?"</p> +<p>The father pointed and smiled uneasily.</p> +<p>"My son," he said slowly, "I came to this place to be free from +the sight of--of aught but holy men. If there were none but men +among you, even were you the Lochlann I took you for--and small +wonder that I did--I had not fled. By no means."</p> +<p>"Why," said Dalfin, with a great laugh, "it must be Gerda whom +he fears! Nay, father, the lady is all kindness, and you need fear +her not at all."</p> +<p>"I may not look on the face of a lady," said the father +solemnly.</p> +<p>"Well, you have done it unawares, and so you may as well make +the best of it, as I think," answered Dalfin. "But, without +jesting, the poor lady is in sore need of shelter and hospitality, +and I think you cannot refuse that. Will you not take us to the +monastery?"</p> +<p>"Monastery, my son? There is none here."</p> +<p>"Why, then, whence come you? Are you weather bound here +also?"</p> +<p>"Aye, by the storms of the world, my son. We are what men call +hermits."</p> +<p>Dalfin looked at me with a rueful face when he heard that. What +a hermit might be I did not at all know, and it meant nothing to +me. I was glad enough to think that there was a roof of any sort +for Gerda.</p> +<p>"Why, father," said my comrade, "you do not sleep on the bare +ground, surely?"</p> +<p>"Not at all, my son. There are six of us, and each has his +cell."</p> +<p>"Cannot you find shelter for one shipwrecked lady? It will not +be for long, as we will go hence with the first chance. We have our +boats."</p> +<p>Now all this while the hermit had his eye on Dalfin's splendid +torque, and at last he spoke of it, hesitatingly.</p> +<p>"My son, it is not good for a man to show idle curiosity--but it +is no foolish question if I ask who you are that you wear the +torque of the O'Neills which was lost."</p> +<p>"I am Dalfin of Maghera, father. The torque has come back to me, +for Dubhtach is avenged."</p> +<p>At that the hermit gave somewhat like a smothered shout, and his +stately way fell from him altogether. He went on his knee before +Dalfin, and seized his hand and kissed it again and again, crying +words of welcome.</p> +<p>"My prince, my prince," he said, with tears of joy running down +his cheeks. "It was told me that you had gone across the seas--but +I did not know it was for this."</p> +<p>Dalfin reddened, and raised the hermit from the sand.</p> +<p>"Father," he said quickly, "I am not the avenger. It is a long +tale--but the lady, who is a queen in Norway, shipwrecked with us +here by a strange fate, has to do with the winning back of the +torque."</p> +<p>"A queen!" said the hermit quickly. "Then the rule of which I +spoke must needs be broken; nay, not broken, but set aside. Now, +where are your men?"</p> +<p>"Never a man have we. There is Malcolm here, and Bertric, a +Saxon thane, who is my friend also and a good Christian, and the +poor young queen, and no more."</p> +<p>The hermit threw up his hands.</p> +<p>"All drowned!" he cried. "Alack, alack! May their souls rest in +peace!"</p> +<p>"We sailed without them, father. There were none, and so they +are all safe at home."</p> +<p>"Good luck to them--for if they had been here they were drowned, +every man of them," said the hermit with much content, looking at +me with some wonder when I laughed.</p> +<p>"They would not be the first by many a score whom we have buried +here," he said in reproof. "Aye, heathen Lochlann and Christian +Scot, and homely Erse yonder. It is good to see even a few who have +escaped from this shore."</p> +<p>He bowed his head for a moment, and his lips moved. Then he +turned to Dalfin as a councillor might turn to his prince, and +asked what he would have the brothers do for him.</p> +<p>"Come and ask the lady," answered Dalfin, and so we went to the +fire, where Gerda and Bertric rose up to meet us.</p> +<p>Now the hermit had set aside his fear of the lady, if he had any +beyond his rules, and welcomed her in Erse, which I had to +translate. Also he told her that what shelter he and his brethren +could give was hers, if she would be content with poor housing.</p> +<p>"Thank him, and tell him that any roof will be welcome after the +ship's deck," she said, smiling at the hermit.</p> +<p>"Ask him to send men and help us get our stores ashore and out +of the way of the fisher folk, who will be here as soon as they see +the wreck," said Bertric. "No need to tell him that the stores are +treasure for the most part."</p> +<p>"Tell him it is treasure, and it will be all the safer," Dalfin +said. "These are holy monks, of a sort who care for poverty more +than wealth. This man was well born, as you may guess from his +speech."</p> +<p>I told the hermit what Bertric needed, and he laughed, saying +that the whole brotherhood would come and help at once. And then he +bade us follow him. We went across the moorland for about half a +mile, to the foot of the hill or nearly, and then came on a little +valley amid the rising ground, where trees grew, low and wind +twisted, but green and pleasant; and there I saw a cluster of +little stone huts for all the world like straw beehives, built of +stones most cunningly, mortarless, but fitting into one another +perfectly.</p> +<p>The huts were set in a rough circle, and each had its door +toward the sun, and a little square window alongside that, and a +smoke-blackened hole in the top of the roof. Doubtless it was from +one of these that Bertric had seen the smoke from the sea, though +there was none now. From the hill and down the valley across the +space between the huts ran a little brook, crossed in two or three +places by wandering paths, some with a stepping stone, and others +with only a muddy jumping place. The stream was dammed into a deep, +stone-walled pool in the midst of the space, and close to the brink +of this stood a tall, black stone cross, which was carved most +wonderfully with interlacing patterns, and had a circle round its +arms.</p> +<p>We saw no men at first. Pigs there were, fat and contented, +which rooted idly or wallowed along the stream, and fowls strolled +among the huts. I saw one peer into an open door, raise one claw +slowly as if she was going in, and then turn and fly, cackling +wildly, as if some inmate had thrown something at her.</p> +<p>"That is brother Fergus," said our guide. "The more he throws +things at the hens, the more they pester him. It is half a loaf +this time. See."</p> +<p>The hen had gone back into the doorway in a hurry, and now +retired behind the hut with the bread, to be joined there by +hurrying friends.</p> +<p>"The pigs will come in a minute," our hermit said, chuckling and +rubbing his hands together. "They know that Fergus hurls what comes +first without heed of what it may be."</p> +<p>He half stayed to watch, and then remembered that he was not +alone or with some of his brethren. We had been silent as we came, +and he had gone before us with the dog in front of him, musing. I +think that he had forgotten us.</p> +<p>"Pardon, prince," he said. "Year in and year out in this place +we have naught but these little haps to lighten our thoughts. We +watch for them, and are disappointed if we miss them. Ah, well, +tonight at least we shall have somewhat more wonderful of which to +talk. I only pray that you, with your breath of the outer +world--warfare and wreck, victory and vengeance--may not leave us +unsettled."</p> +<p>He sighed, and turned back to the way once more with bent head. +He seemed a young man to be in this desolate place of his own free +will, for his black beard and hair were hardly grizzled with the +passing years yet.</p> +<p>There was a low wall round the gathering of huts, the gate being +closed with a wattled hurdle, lest the pigs should wander. Here the +hermit stopped, and before he opened the gate lifted his voice and +cried loudly in the tongue which I did not know.</p> +<p>There was a stir then in the peaceful enclosure. Out of the huts +came in all haste men clad like our guide, speaking to one another +fast, with eager faces and gestures. At that time I counted nine +huts, and thought that we need turn out none of these strange hosts +of ours.</p> +<p>P Again our hermit cried out, for the rest did not come to meet +us. I saw Dalfin smiling, and asked what it all meant in a low +voice.</p> +<p>"I have more than half forgotten the little Latin they taught me +at Monasterboice long ago," he answered; "but he is telling them +that here we have not a lady merely, but a queen. It is the first +trouble again."</p> +<p>Now the brethren consulted, still standing in the hut doors, and +at last, being thereto exhorted once more by our friend, they came +toward us slowly, as if wishing to show that they had no longing +for things outside their island cares. Five out of these six were +old men, our guide being the youngest, and two of them were very +old, with long, white beards. One of these two came forward as they +neared us, and spoke for the rest, greeting Dalfin first, as their +prince, with all respect, though not at all in the humble way in +which he had first been hailed.</p> +<p>"It is our good fortune," he said, "that we are able to shelter +you. It has been our sorrow that up till this time those strangers +who have come from the sea have needed nothing from us but the last +rites. We are all unused to guests, and you will forgive us if we +know not how to treat them rightly. But what we can do we +will."</p> +<p>He waved his hands toward the huts, and said no more. Dalfin +thanked him, and after he had heard, he paid no more heed to us, +but turned to our guide.</p> +<p>"Brother Phelim," he said wearily, "see you to all that may be +done. The care must be yours, as was the first welcome. I do not +know why you wandered so far at this hour."</p> +<p>"Because I thought there might be poor folk in need, father," +said Phelim meekly. "Moreover, I am shepherd today."</p> +<p>The old man waved his hand as if to say that the excuse was +enough, and with that turned and went his way, leaning on the arm +of the other ancient brother, the three who had stood behind them +making way reverently.</p> +<p>"He is our superior," whispered Phelim. "He has been here for +forty years. He will forget that he has seen you presently. Now, +come, and we will see how we may best bestow you."</p> +<p>"Concerning what is on board the ship," said Bertric, staying +him. "It is needful that we get it ashore before the tide turns. It +is but half an hour's hard work, at the most, if you folk +help."</p> +<p>Phelim stared, for Bertric spoke in the Dansk tongue we had been +using. I had to translate for him, and Phelim nodded.</p> +<p>"Tell the sea captain that all will be well. We will return at +once. We do but find a house for the queen."</p> +<p>So we went on to the central green amid the huts, and there +stood and looked round, while Phelim and Fergus deliberated for a +time. It seemed that the pigs had one empty hut, and the fowls +another. The largest was the chapel, and so there was not one +vacant. I think that they each wished for the honour of turning out +for us.</p> +<p>"Father Phelim," I said at last, for Bertric waxed impatient, +"let one good brother leave his cell for that of another, leaving +it free for the queen, and then we can shift for ourselves. We do +not at all mind sleeping in the open, for so we have fared for the +last week and more."</p> +<p>But they would not have that, and in the end Phelim himself led +Gerda with much pride to his own cell and handed it over to her, +while another brother left his cell to us three, it being a large +one, which, indeed, is not saying much for the rest. We were likely +to be warm enough in it; but the cells were clean and dry, each +with a bed of heather and a stone table and stool, and some little +store of rough crockery and the like household things. There were +blankets, too, and rugs for hanging across the doors, which seemed +in some abundance. Afterwards, I found that they were washed ashore +from wrecks at different times.</p> +<p>Then we went back to the shore in all haste. I had doubts as to +whether Gerda would care to be left alone in this strange place, +but she laughed, and said that there was naught to fear. The two +old brothers had gone their way to their own cells, and would not +come forth again till vesper time, as Phelim told us. She had the +little village, if one may call it so, to herself, therefore, till +we returned. But Phelim set his crook against the hut wall as he +went.</p> +<p>"The pigs need a stick at times," he said; "it may be +handy."</p> +<p>The tide had ebbed far when we reached the place of the wreck +again, and had bared a long, black reef, which, with never an +opening in it, reached as far as we could see along the shore. It +was only the chance of the high spring tide, driven yet higher than +its wont by the wind on the shore, which had suffered us to clear +it. It was that which we touched slightly as we came in among the +first breakers. We had had a narrow escape.</p> +<p>In an hour we had all that was worth taking ashore saved. The +chests of arms, and those of the bales which the sea had not +reached, and the chest of silver, were all on the beach, and we got +the larger of the two boats over the side, and ran her up into +safety, with her fittings. And then, for there was yet time, Dalfin +would have us save the wonderful carved wagon which was on the deck +unhurt, and that, too, we took ashore, and with it some of the +casks of food stores which had been so lavishly stored for that +strange voyage. We should not burden the good brothers with this to +help feed us.</p> +<p>For the sea was coming in more heavily still as it gathered +weight with the long gale, which was still blowing hard. It was +more than likely that the ship would go to pieces in the night as +the tide rose again. Now and then the rain squalls came up and +drenched us, and passed; but the brothers cared as little for them +as did we, and enjoyed the unusual work more. It was a wonder to +them to see their young prince working as hard as themselves as we +carried the heavy things up the beach.</p> +<p>"It is a matter which I have learned while on my travels," he +said, when Fergus said somewhat of the sort to him gently. "I have +seen these two friends, who are nobles in their own lands, work as +hard at oar and rope's end as they would at fighting. Moreover, it +is well to do things for myself now and then--as, for instance, +swimming."</p> +<p>Now we loaded the wagon, which was easy to put together, and the +brethren harnessed themselves to it, laughing. They would not +suffer us to help, and we had to walk behind the wagon in a sort of +idle train, not altogether sorry to rest, for we were very weary by +this time. As for the hermits, they made light of the rough way and +the load, being like schoolboys let loose. I do not suppose that +they had laughed thus for many a long day, and it was good to watch +them.</p> +<p>So we came to the huts, and set down our load. Presently the +brothers would bestow the things under cover, but there was no more +to come. So we did but take Gerda her own chest, and have the court +men's to the hut which had been given us. We bade Phelim, as guest +master, take what he would of the provender as he liked, saying it +was theirs altogether; and he thanked us simply, more for our own +sake than theirs, as I know. They would not let us go back to the +shore for the next load.</p> +<p>"Bide and rest," said Fergus; "this is a holiday for us, and we +enjoy it. We shall talk of it all for many a long day; but for you +it is but an added and needless weariness."</p> +<p>So, nothing loath, we sat on the stone blocks which were set for +seats outside Gerda's hut, and watched them go with the wagon. +Presently Gerda came and asked for a little help, and I went and +moved her chest for her, and hung a heavy curtain, which I have no +doubt was a wrecked boat's sail once, to its stone pegs across the +door. They had lit a fire for her at the first, and the cell was +comfortable altogether.</p> +<p>"Now I shall rest," she said. "By and by, no doubt, you will +bring me supper, but it is strange not to feel the tossing of the +ship. It is wonderful to be warm and in safety once more. You have +been very good to me."</p> +<p>But I thought of her patience and cheerfulness through the +countless discomforts and dangers of the voyage, and knew that the +praise was hers.</p> +<p>"We have said truly that you are a sea-king's daughter indeed, +my queen," I answered. "It is enough to hear you say that we are +not useless courtmen."</p> +<p>We three went to our hut and took off our mail, and found dry +clothing in the chest, with many thanks to the careful half-dozen +warriors who had kept their best therein. Then in much comfort we +saw to our arms, red with the sea rust, and hung them round the +cell, which was some nine feet across and about the same height, +and by the time that pleasant work was done the brothers were back, +and the little bell on the chapel, where it hung in a stone cote, +rang for their vespers.</p> +<p>They bade us come also, and Bertric and Dalfin rose up and went +gladly. I had no thought that I could be welcome, and was staying, +but Phelim called me.</p> +<p>"Malcolm is a Norse Scot," said Dalfin quietly. "He is not of +our faith, and I do not know if he may come.</p> +<p>"If he will, he may," answered the hermit kindly. "He can be no +evil heathen, seeing that he is your friend."</p> +<p>So, not wishing to seem ungracious, I followed them into the +chapel, which was stone built after the same manner as the cells, +but with a ridge roof instead of the rounded top, and much larger, +being about fifteen feet long and ten wide. Over the door was a +cross of white stones set in the wall, and at the eastern end was a +cross also, and an altar, on which were candles of wax, at which I +wondered, seeing them in this place. Round the walls ran a stone +slab as bench, but I was the only one who used it. The others +knelt, facing eastward, and I, at a sign from Bertric, sat by the +door, wondering what I should see and hear.</p> +<p>There was enough for me to wonder at. I heard them pray, and I +heard them sing, and whether of prayer or song the words were good +to listen to. I heard them pray for the safety of men at sea in the +gale, and for men who fought with the Danes ashore. They prayed +that the hands of the Danes who slew their brethren in the churches +round the coast wantonly might be stayed from these doings; but +they did not pray for the destruction of these terrible foes. They +asked that they might be forgiven for the wrong they did to +harmless men. And I heard them read from a book whose leaves, as +the reader turned them, I saw were bright with gold and colours, +words that I cannot set down--words of uttermost peace in the midst +of strife. I had never heard or thought the like. I did not know +that it could be in the minds of men so to speak and write. I +thought that I would ask Phelim more concerning it at some time if +I had the chance.</p> +<p>The brethren rose up with still faces and happy, and the vespers +were over. We went out into the wind again, and across to the cell +they had given us, and there they gave us a supper of barley bread +and milk, setting aside some for Gerda in a beautiful silver bowl, +which Phelim said had come from the shore after a wreck long +ago.</p> +<p>Now, we three had some thought that one of us had better watch +through the night, if only for Gerda's comfort. But Phelim heard us +speak thereof, and laughed.</p> +<p>"My sons," he said, "there is naught to watch against in all +this little island, save only the ghostly foe, against whom your +arms were of no avail. Nay, do you sleep in peace. All the night +long we watch in turns in the chapel, and will wake you, if by some +strange chance there is need."</p> +<p>"What do you watch against then, father?" I asked, somewhat +idly. "Wolves round your folds?"</p> +<p>"Aye," he answered; "the wolf of all wolves."</p> +<p>"Ah, the wolf will come from the mainland, betimes, I +suppose."</p> +<p>"Most of all we fear him thence," Phelim answered, with a quaint +smile. "Nay, my son, it is no earthly wolf we watch against. +Hereafter you may learn, or the prince will tell you even now, if +you will. Rest in peace."</p> +<p>He lifted his hand and blessed us, even as he had done when he +met us on the shore, and left us. They had brought fresh heather +for our bedding while we ate, and blankets, and though the light +still lingered in the west, we did not wait for darkness. We slept, +as shipwrecked men will sleep, when at last others watch for +them.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch10" id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: Planning And +Learning.</h2> +<p>Twelve good hours I slept that night without stirring, and woke +feeling like a new man and fit for aught. The first thing I noticed +was the strange calm which brooded over all things, for the wind +had gone down, and the long, steady roar of the surf was far off +and all unlike the ceaseless rush and countless noises of the +labouring ship at sea. There came a little drone of chanting from +the chapel a hundred yards away, and there was now and again the +bleat of a sheep, and the homely crow of the cocks, sounding as if +shut up somewhere still. For a time I stayed, enjoying the unwonted +calm, and then the sunlight crept into the little window, and I +rose, and went out. My two comrades still slept.</p> +<p>It was a wonderful morning after the storm. The coast of the +mainland across the narrow strait seemed close at hand, piled with +great, soft, green mountains above the black cliffs, tier after +tier of them stretching inland as far as the eye could see. In the +valleys between them nestled forests, dark and deep, and in one +place I saw the thin lines of smoke rising, which told of houses. +The hill which made the best part of this island barred my view to +the westward, but it was not high enough to hide the mountain tops +on the mainland altogether. There was a fire lighted on it this +morning as if it might be a beacon. I minded that Phelim had said +that they would call the fishers from the mainland to come over for +us when they might venture, and I supposed that this was their +signal.</p> +<p>I looked across, past the tall, black cross to where Gerda's hut +stood, and it was as I had last seen it. The folds of the curtain +at the door had not been moved, and Phelim's crook stood where he +set it. The pigs were shut up somewhere even yet. Then the bell on +the roof of the little chapel rang once or twice, and I went near. +But this morning there was a closed door before me, the only door +in all the place. I know now that it was the hour of the morning +mass, but wondered at the time why the door was closed and why the +bell rang.</p> +<p>My going out woke Bertric, and he joined me, saying, half to +himself, that he should have been in time for the service. He, too, +looked all the better for the rest, and I dare say that the help of +the comb, which Fergus lent us in sheer compassion overnight, had +worked no small change in that direction.</p> +<p>We wandered down to the shore and looked at the wreck. The ship +had broken up in the night, and nothing but her gaunt ribs stood in +a deep pool on the wet sands. On the beach at our feet lay the +gilded and green dragon's head from her stem, and all along were +strewn oars and planking, and the like. It was pitiful enough. But +the brothers had toiled till light failed them, for they had saved +the other boat and the sledges, and also the sail, together with +smaller things, among which was the cauldron of our first meals, +which was a treasure to them. Inside it, on the sand hill, was the +little silver cup from the penthouse, too, and the empty wine +pitcher lay hard by.</p> +<p>"There are men who would pray for a wreck like this every week," +said Bertric, with a short laugh. "But it will be all that we can +do to get these good men to keep what they have saved, even if the +things are of any use to them. They need little and covet +naught."</p> +<p>Presently he heaved a great sigh, and half turned from the sea, +as if impatient.</p> +<p>"As good a little ship as ever was framed," he said. "And to +come to such an end. Mishandled on a lee shore."</p> +<p>"Why, there is no blame to us," I said. "We were helpless."</p> +<p>"It lies heavy on my mind that we ought to have weathered the +point yonder; I held on too long. At best I knew where she was +strained, and should have gone on the other tack first. And the +canvas we got on her! We might have done better than that."</p> +<p>"It did not seem so at the time," I answered, laughing. "It is +easy to think now of what might have been done."</p> +<p>"So it is. But for all my days I shall feel it in my bones that +I threw the ship away. I shall dream that I am weathering the +island. Two ships I have lost running."</p> +<p>"One by war and the other by sheer misfortune," I answered. "You +make too much of it altogether."</p> +<p>He laughed ruefully. "Well, think what a voyage we might have +had if we had chanced to pick up a crew."</p> +<p>"It was your own doing that Heidrek did not pick us up," I said. +"Maybe that thought will comfort you somewhat."</p> +<p>"I was never glad of a fog before," he answered.</p> +<p>And there that matter ended, for now we had wandered to a place +whence we could see the strait between us and the mainland, which +we must cross presently.</p> +<p>That was not yet possible, for here the currents, as the tide +rose and swirled round either end of the island, were like a mill +race, while the heavy sea which still beat on the shore made the +turmoil still wilder as it set across the narrow opening.</p> +<p>"Here we have to bide till that mends," said Bertric. "We must +make the best of it, for a day or two. Maybe it matters little, for +Gerda needs rest. And Dalfin will sleep till midday if we let him. +He is worn out."</p> +<p>"He was full of all that would happen when we came as honoured +guests to his father's place, as we talked last evening," I said. +"That all sounds well enough for a time. But thereafter--what are +our plans to be?"</p> +<p>"In what way?" he answered, staying his steps, and looking +gravely at me.</p> +<p>Now this was the first chance we two had had of private talk. As +may be supposed, we had been drawn together much during the voyage, +partly as seamen, and also partly because Norseman and Saxon are +kin, while the Irishman was almost as much a stranger to me as to +Bertric. Moreover, Dalfin was at home once more, and we were +wanderers. So I spoke plainly, not seeing any need to beat about +the bush with this quiet friend, of whom I surely learnt so much in +the long days of peril together.</p> +<p>"I have no plans beyond those I may make for the help of Gerda," +I said. "If your home does not call you maybe it is well for +her."</p> +<p>"There are none who will trouble much concerning me until the +autumn," he answered. "I am a free man in that matter, and it need +not trouble you. Let me work with you in this, for, indeed, I shall +not be happy until I have seen her in safety again, and in her own +land, if that may be what she wishes."</p> +<p>"That will be her first wish," I answered, being sure +thereof.</p> +<p>In those last days on board the ship, when I was not taking my +turn at the helm, I had spoken much with Gerda, sitting on the deck +just without the little shelter we had rigged for her aft, and ever +her thoughts had gone back to Norway and a home there.</p> +<p>"You and I must see this through together," Bertric said +frankly. "I knew that this would be your one thought, and you will +be none the worse off for someone to help. 'Bare is back without +brother behind it,' as your old saw goes."</p> +<p>I held out my hand to him on that bargain with a great relief, +and he took it and laughed.</p> +<p>"Maybe we are making much of what need be little trouble," he +said; "but we cannot tell. We are in a strange land, and, from all +I ever heard, a troubled one. A lady is no light charge. Let us see +if we can find her before Dalfin wakes. I think we must plan apart +from him for a while, for he is full of our biding always here in +Ireland. Which, of course, is out of the question."</p> +<p>Now we turned back to the village, and as we went I asked +Bertric what he would do when our end had been gained, and Gerda +was once more in Norway, and at rest.</p> +<p>"Make my way home," he answered. "There will be ships who will +be glad of a pilot into English ports, if none happen to want a +master. That is easy for me. What of yourself?"</p> +<p>"A Norse king is always glad of a courtman," I said. "Or the +Orkney earl will not let me be idle if I go to him."</p> +<p>"Aye," he said, "a man can always find a place. I do not think +you will have to seek far."</p> +<p>We found Gerda up the glen, watching Fergus milk the little +black and white kine which had their byres in that sheltered place. +Among the trees wandered half a score of goats, and the ground was +white with the wind flowers everywhere. She was bright, and seemed +very fair that morning, rejoicing in rest and the peace that was +all around.</p> +<p>"See," she said, after our greeting, "even the birds are not +feared of us here. They are the little brothers and sisters of the +hermits."</p> +<p>So indeed it seemed, for the wood birds flew to us, seeking the +food which the brethren never failed to bring them. Gerda stretched +out her hand with some crumbs of bread, and they perched thereon, +fearless, while Fergus looked up at us and smiled a good +morning.</p> +<p>"Have you found your breakfast, my sons?" he asked. "We set it +in your cell; but the prince slept still, and we did not wake +him."</p> +<p>We had not looked into the hut, and so went back slowly, Gerda +with us. And on the way we asked how we might try to plan for +her.</p> +<p>"Oh, if you will but do so," she said eagerly. "In any case, let +me go back to Norway as soon as I may. Yet I do not know where to +look for a friend who can help me to my own there."</p> +<p>"We had thought of Harald Harfager, the king," I said. "He was +Thorwald's friend, as you told us. He will act as your +guardian."</p> +<p>She looked at us in some surprise.</p> +<p>"Have you heard naught from Norway of late?" she asked.</p> +<p>Bertric had heard none, and we in Caithness were out of the way +of news.</p> +<p>"Harald has been dead these six months and more," she said +sadly. "Now his son, Eric Bloodaxe, reigns unquietly. Men hate him, +and with reason. That terrible name of his may tell you why. +Arnkel, who tried to burn me, is hand in glove with him."</p> +<p>Then Bertric said:</p> +<p>"Have you heard naught of Hakon, that son of Harald, whom our +king, Athelstane, has brought up in England?"</p> +<p>"No," she answered, shaking her head. "We have heard naught. We +would that we had, for all men speak well of him, and it was hoped +that he would be back rather than that this terrible half-brother +of his should take the throne."</p> +<p>"I know him," Bertric said. "It were well for Norway if he did +return. Good warrior and good Christian he is, and that means good +friend, moreover."</p> +<p>"We must make for Dublin," I said. "We must go to the Norse +king, Sigtryg, who is there, and ask him for help. It will be hard +if we cannot find a ship to serve us--even if not men who will sail +to set a queen in her place once more."</p> +<p>"If that fails," put in Bertric, "we will go to England and +speak with Hakon himself. Maybe he will take you back to Norway +when he sails. For he will sail."</p> +<p>Gerda laughed, and shook her head again.</p> +<p>"You make too much of me. Hakon would not heed so small a +matter. No, take me to Norway, and I will find my cousins who are +in the south, and there I may be welcome. At least, I shall be no +burden to them, and they are folk who live on their own land. It +will be the quiet life of the homestead and the saeter which I +love."</p> +<p>She sighed, and there was a far-off look in her eyes as if she +saw again the Norse mountains and streams and the flower-edged +glaciers, and heard the song of the maidens on the pastures round +the saeters, and the homing call for the cattle, and longed for +them.</p> +<p>"What of yourselves?" she said presently, and a little timidly +as I thought.</p> +<p>"We shall not be content till we have seen you in safety, and in +Norway if that may be," I answered. "That is all we have to think +of now."</p> +<p>"We are two men at a loose end if we have not you to follow as +your courtmen," added Bertric. "We would pray you not to turn us +off."</p> +<p>"It is good to hear you speak so," she said, with a smile that +was of sheer relief. "But it is a barren service, though I would +not part with you if it must be put in that way. I think that I +could not have found better friends, and I fear nothing while you +are near."</p> +<p>So she went on to thank us for all our thought for her, as if we +did something wonderful, and we were fain to laugh and make light +of it.</p> +<p>"Now we are bound for Norway," said Bertric. "What shall be done +with all this troublesome treasure? We cannot hale it all over +Ireland."</p> +<p>We thought it best to leave the bulk of it with the hermits, +taking enough for all possible needs in silver coin and in the +rings and links of gold, which were easily carried and hidden. For +we had heard from Dalfin how that between the courts of the Irish +kings and that of Sigtryg of Dublin was little intercourse, save +when fighting was on hand. But of that there was no need to tell +Gerda, there being peace at present, so far as the hermits knew, +and good reason for at least civility when she was concerned. As +for the things we left here, they might he picked up on our way to +Norway. So we planned, and thereafter went back to the cells and to +Dalfin, who woke at noontide or thereabout with a great hunger on +him.</p> +<p>So that day wore on in utter quietness and rest, while the wind +and sea fell. Late in that afternoon, when the tide was at its +lowest and the slack water was more still, Phelim came hastily and +told us that there were fishers on the way from their village to +us. Whereat we wondered; for still the sea ran high, and we +ourselves had not dreamed of putting out in our boat.</p> +<p>But when we reached the rocky shore which looked on the strait, +so it was. Rising and falling on the waves came a tiny craft with +two men in it, and I have seldom seen a boat better handled in a +sea way. Yet when they came close, it was but a wicker framework, +covered with skins, the two men kneeling on the floor, and using +narrow, single-bladed paddles, one on either side or both on the +same side as need might be.</p> +<p>They came carefully alongside a flat rock which they were wont +to use as a landing place, and one leapt out, running to Father +Phelim, and kneeling to him for his blessing. It was hard to make +out his rough speech, but it was plain that his folk had feared +lest somewhat should be amiss with the hermits. Phelim told them +that their prince was here, and then there was much homage done of +a humble sort to Dalfin, who took it as a matter of course, though +the manner of it was more cringing and excited than any Norseman +could have put up with. Presently, when all that was over, they +asked him what his commands were, knowing that they had been +summoned for his service.</p> +<p>He told them that they must go to his father, their king, and +ask him to send a guard to meet us as soon as possible at their +village, with all that was needed for our journey to the court. +Thereafter they were to send their largest boat to ferry us across +to the other side. Then he dismissed them, bidding them use all +speed, and again they did homage after their manner, and bent +before Phelim, and so paddled out among the waves as swiftly and +skilfully as they had come. There was never a word of pay or even +reward spoken. It would seem to be enough for them that they should +be honoured in serving their lord, or else they had no choice but +to do his bidding. Maybe that last is most likely.</p> +<p>Now we had to wait for their signal that all was ready for us, +and how long that might be we could not tell. It depended mostly on +where the king was holding his court, which the fishers did not +know. In the end it came to pass that we had to wait four days +here, and I will not say that they went at all quickly.</p> +<p>Dalfin waxed moody before the next day was over. He was one of +those who loved excitement, and are only happy when one thing +follows another fast, caring not what it may be so long as there is +somewhat, even danger. I think it was as well that he was a mighty +sleeper, being content to lie on a warm sand hill and slumber +between his meals. Bertric and I built a pig stye out of wreck wood +for the hermits, which pleased them mightily, and was certainly +better than doing nothing. Gerda watched us quietly, and then we +would climb to the top of the hill and look out toward the land in +hopes of seeing the fire which the fishers were to light when all +was in order for our going.</p> +<p>So it chanced on the second day that she and I had been up the +hill together, and were coming back to Bertric and his work down +the little glen, when we came suddenly on the old superior, who was +walking with bent head among the trees of a clearing, musing. We +had not seen him since the day when we came ashore.</p> +<p>He started when he saw us, and looked at us as if it was the +first time that he had met us; and we were about to pass him +quickly, with a little due reverence. But he spoke, and we +stopped.</p> +<p>"I remember," he said. "You are the Lochlannoch who were cast +ashore. Is all well with you?"</p> +<p>"In every way, father," I answered in the Gaelic.</p> +<p>He looked hard at me for a moment, and his face flushed slowly. +It had been white before with the whiteness that comes of a dark +cell and long biding within it. Only the warm sun had taken him out +today, for Phelim said that he was close on ninety years of age. +Then he set forth his hand to me, and laid it on my arm.</p> +<p>"Tell me who you are," he said.</p> +<p>"We are Norse folk, cast ashore here by mischance in the +gale."</p> +<p>"Norse?" he said. "Yet you speak the tongue of my childhood--the +kindly Gaelic of the islands which is not that altogether of the +Erse of today. It is full sixty years since I heard it."</p> +<p>"My mother was a Scottish lady," I answered. "My own name is +Malcolm."</p> +<p>"Tell me more," he said eagerly. "Let me hear the old tongue +again before I die."</p> +<p>Now, it is in no wise easy to be told to talk without a hint in +the way of question on which to begin, and I hesitated. Gerda asked +me softly what was amiss, and I told her in a few words. The old +hermit looked kindly at her, but did not speak.</p> +<p>"Tell him of your home," she said. "Tell him without saying +aught of the end of it."</p> +<p>I did so, slowly at first, for the words would not come, and +then better as I went on. The old man listened, and the tears came +into his eyes.</p> +<p>"Ah, the old days," he said, when I stopped. "Your voice is a +voice from the days that are gone, and the old tongue comes back to +me, with the sound of the piper on the hill and the harper in the +hall, with the sough of the summer wind in the fir trees, and the +lash of the waves on the rocks. Oh, my son, my son, I would that +you had never come here to make me mind the things that are +dead."</p> +<p>Now he was trembling, and I took his white hand and set it on my +arm to steady him. His hand felt the cold touch of the great gold +bracelet Gerda would have me wear, and he looked at it, and turned +it in his fingers.</p> +<p>"Jarl, and son of a jarl," he whispered. "War and flame, and the +cry of the victors! Oh, my son, you mind me of bitter things."</p> +<p>"I and mine have never hurt Christian folk, father," I said, +knowing what he meant.</p> +<p>The sword and fire had fallen heavily on the Scottish islands +when the Norseman first came thither. But surely he could not mind +that.</p> +<p>Thereafter Phelim told me that he thought the old man spoke of +the burning of some monastery on the mainland of Scotland, whence +he had fled, with those of his brethren who escaped, to Ireland, +coming hither at last to end his days in peace. But I heard no more +from himself now. What I had just spoken turned his thoughts +afresh, and I was glad.</p> +<p>"Then you are a heathen; and this lady also?"</p> +<p>"We are Odin's folk," I answered. "I suppose that is what you +mean, father."</p> +<p>"Yet I think now that I saw you once in the chapel."</p> +<p>"You may do so again, father, if it is permitted by you. I have +heard naught but good words there."</p> +<p>His eyes brightened, and he smiled at me.</p> +<p>"You know nothing of the faith then?" he asked.</p> +<p>I shook my head. I had heard never a word of it until I met my +friends.</p> +<p>"We will teach you," he said eagerly. "Sit here, my children, in +this warm place, and let me tell you somewhat thereof. It may be +the last time I may teach the heathen. Aye, I have done it in days +long ago."</p> +<p>I spoke to Gerda then, telling her what the old father wished, +and she smiled at the thought.</p> +<p>"We have naught to do," she said, "and if it will give him +pleasure we may as well bide here."</p> +<p>So we sat down on the bank in the sun amid the quiet of the +woodland, and listened. The wood flowers carpeted the ground, and +Gerda plucked those that were in reach and played with them while +the father began his words. Presently he saw that Gerda was paying +no heed, and he bade me translate, hearing that she did not +understand. And by that time he spoke the old tongue of his youth, +and the Erse way of speaking was forgotten.</p> +<p>Then he told us things which every Christian child knows; but +which were new and wonderful and very good to hear, to us two. Soon +Gerda had forgotten the flowers, and was listening, and presently +asking questions as might a child who hears the sweetest tale ever +told. So still we were, and so soft the voice of the old man, that +the birds the hermits were wont to feed came close to us, and a +robin perched on the shoulder of the father, and he smiled at +it.</p> +<p>"See," he said, "the breast of the little bird is red because it +had compassion on its Maker as He suffered, and would pluck the +cruel thorns away."</p> +<p>And so with all homely words and simple he taught us, and we +were fain to listen. Odin and the Asir seemed far off at that time +and in that place, and I half blamed myself for harkening.</p> +<p>"What of our Asir?" I said at last.</p> +<p>"Heroes of the old days," he said. "Heroes whom their sons have +worshipped; because a man must needs worship the greatest whom he +knows."</p> +<p>"And what has become of them?"</p> +<p>He shook his head. "They are in the hands of the true +Allfather," he answered. "I cannot tell more than that. It is +enough."</p> +<p>"I have heard it said," I went on, for here was somewhat which +troubled me, "that you Christians hold that we worship fiends--that +the Asir are such."</p> +<p>"That were to wrong the heroes of the past, my son," he +answered. "It is meant that you know not what you worship under +those honoured names. There are those among you who know that the +Asir were your forefathers. Did you ever hear that Alfred, the wise +and most Christian king of England, was ashamed of that ancestry of +his?"</p> +<p>"I myself cannot be ashamed thereof. I am from the line of +Odin," I said. "If you speak truth, father, one count against +Christians has passed, from my mind at least."</p> +<p>But now Gerda spoke timidly, for she too had her question at +this time.</p> +<p>"What of women, father? Is there a place for them in the heaven +of which you speak? Was it won for us?"</p> +<p>"Most truly, my daughter. It is for the woman as for the man. +There is no difference."</p> +<p>I saw her face light up with a new wonder and joy, which told me +that here was no idle listener. And so the old teacher went on in +all kindly wisdom, never hurting us in aught he said of the old +gods, but leading us to see the deeper things which our forebears +had forgotten. I listened, and thought it all good; but betimes +Gerda wept quietly, and would fain hear more and more. The little +bell on the chapel rang for the vespers or ever we ended that long +talk, and the old man must go. I raised him up, for he was very +feeble, and again the touch of the gold put a word into his +mind.</p> +<p>"Jarl, and son of Odin," he said, smiling, "no need for you to +wait that dim Ragnarok fight of yours for warfare against evil. +That fight has begun, and in it you may take your part now, that +you may share in the victory hereafter."</p> +<p>Then I said, for I minded how useless to me seemed this life +here:</p> +<p>"What part have you therein, father--you and the brethren?"</p> +<p>"We pray for those who have forgotten to do so for themselves," +he answered. "And we are of those whose sorest fight has been +against evil within."</p> +<p>So we went into the chapel for the vespers with him, and the day +was done. But in the morning there hung on the black cross on the +green grass a wreath of white flowers which no brother had set +there.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch11" id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: The Summons Of The +Beacons.</h2> +<p>Now, for all the peace of this holy island there hung over it an +ever-present fear of which I learned when we spoke to Phelim +concerning the treasure which we would leave in the care of the +brethren when we went hence.</p> +<p>He said that it was well if we would do so, and that they would +bury it under that new shed which we had helped to build, since no +Danes would wonder at seeing newly-turned earth there.</p> +<p>"Moreover," he said, "if we are not here when you come for it, +you will know where it is."</p> +<p>He said this quietly, and as a matter of course, and I asked him +in surprise if it was likely that they would leave their +island.</p> +<p>"Not alive," he answered; "but the Danes may spy our +easily-taken flocks at any time, and come ashore here."</p> +<p>"Why, they would not harm the unresisting," I said.</p> +<p>"Nay, but we are priests of the faith, therefore the heathen +rage against us. Already they have slain almost every brotherhood +along the shores of this land, and of Scotland. Our turn may come +at any time."</p> +<p>He was in no way disquieted at this terrible thought. Thereafter +I knew that to him such a death was martyrdom, and most +glorious.</p> +<p>But Bertric listened with a troubled face, and presently, when +we were alone again, he said that he was anxious.</p> +<p>"I only hope that we may not have brought trouble on these good +men who have sheltered us," he said. "There was a ship which must +have seen us cast ashore here."</p> +<p>"We should have had her back by this time if she meant seeking +us."</p> +<p>"It is not her whom I fear," he answered. "This ship of ours was +too precious for Heidrek to let go easily. So soon as that fog +cleared, and he found we were not ahead on the Norway shore, he +would put about. He knew that we must be undermanned, being so +close to us. Then he would get back to where he lost us, and +thereafter would guess the only course we could have taken, for the +matter of handling the sail would settle that. We could not have +gone far ere the wind dropped. Then supposing he picked up our +mast?"</p> +<p>"Unlikely enough," I said. "We are raising trouble for +ourselves."</p> +<p>Bertric shook his head. "I know Heidrek only too well. He may +spend this season in hunting for the treasure which he so nearly +had. News of a wreck flies fast, and he has but to touch here and +there on our track or thereabout to hear of us sooner or +later."</p> +<p>Now, I did not trouble much more about this, but it bided in +Bertric's mind, and made him restless. That third day passed +without sign from the mainland, as was likely, seeing that the +fishers had to reach the king. It would have been of no use for us +to take the boat and cross, for Dalfin told us that we needs must +have horses, and maybe a guard when we would go to his place, which +was a long day's ride from the shore. We were well cared for here, +and it was a pleasant place wherein to wait.</p> +<p>In the evening the old superior sent for us again, and sitting +once more in the sheltered glen, he taught us, taking up his tale +where we had left it, after making me speak the old tongue of his +youth to him for a little while. He was a wonderful teacher, clear +and patient, and it would have been strange if we had not learned +from him.</p> +<p>Yet I cannot say that I seemed to learn much. I clung to the old +faith of my fathers, and that was not wonderful. But Gerda learned, +and loved all that she heard. I had to turn the words of the +teacher into the homely Norse for her, and her questions were many +and eager.</p> +<p>Somewhere about midnight thereafter, Bertric woke with a start +which roused me, so that I sat up and asked what was amiss.</p> +<p>"I do not know," he answered; "but it lies on my mind that +somewhat has happened, or is to happen. Somewhat evil."</p> +<p>"The last talk of Heidrek has raised fears in your mind," I +said.</p> +<p>Then across the stone-framed window came a flare of red light, +and we both sprang to our feet and went to the door. Dalfin +stirred, but did not wake. And when we were in the open all was +still in the moonlight round us, but on the mainland every hill +inland to the westward was tipped with the flame of beacon fires, +newly lighted.</p> +<p>That which had waked Bertric, as one may suppose, with its first +flash, was set on the hill over the fishers' village, whence we +were to look for the signal to tell us to be ready for departure. +It had been just lighted, and blazed up fiercely as we stood +outside the cell. Five minutes later another fire answered it to +the eastward, and again beyond that a third, and fourth, one after +the other, as men saw the glare.</p> +<p>"Foes landing to the westward," said Bertric. "The fires run +thence. Maybe the ship we saw went down the coast and has +returned."</p> +<p>Now we woke Dalfin, who came out yawning, and looked.</p> +<p>"Danes, I suppose," he said carelessly. "That is the usual +trouble; or else Connaught men on the raid. Well, as we cannot get +at them, we need not trouble concerning them. And they cannot reach +us."</p> +<p>"The fires sprang up quickly as if men watched by them tonight," +said Bertric. "Some enemy was looked for."</p> +<p>"You have seen the like before then?" asked Dalfin.</p> +<p>"Not once or twice. And for the same reason--the Danes."</p> +<p>"Have you fought with them?"</p> +<p>"I was at my own place when we beat them off once."</p> +<p>So we stood and watched the fires until they twinkled as far as +we could see to the eastward. Westward the hill, as I have said, +cut off sight of both cliffs and open sea, but over it was the glow +in the sky of far-off beacons.</p> +<p>Fergus came out of the chapel, and I heard him give a little cry +as he saw the fires. Then he came to us, seeing us in the +moonlight, which was bright.</p> +<p>"No need to fear, my sons," he said in his still voice. "Many a +time I have seen those fires before, and doubtless shall see them +again. The trouble may be far off, and of little account. Sleep in +peace."</p> +<p>We turned in again, but sleep was broken until daylight came, +and we were astir with the first gleam of sun across the door. It +was a bright morning, with a steady sea breeze from the northeast, +and every promise of the fine weather that comes withal in the +summer. On the hills the smoke of the war beacons still rose and +drifted, but there was no sign of stir at the foot of the glen on +the mainland where the fishers had their haven, such as it was.</p> +<p>The brethren came from their cells, looked at the black smoke +wreaths, and sighed, and went their ways into the chapel for the +matins, and the little bell rang. Then Gerda came from her cell and +saw us, for she, too, was early wakeful here in the quiet.</p> +<p>"Why are you looking so troubled? she asked us, as we bade her +good morrow. Her eyes went from one to the other in some dismay, +for I dare say we showed that the night had been unquiet for +us.</p> +<p>"There seems to be some trouble on the mainland," I answered. +"There are beacon fires yonder, but the brothers think little of +them. They are not unusual here from all accounts."</p> +<p>"By no means," said Dalfin. "And they may mean little. At the +most, we may be kept waiting here for a day or two longer while my +father gathers men and goes to see what is amiss. Now I have a mind +to ask the hermits to call the fishers and let me cross and help, +if so be there is fighting on hand.</p> +<p>"You would come also, would you not?" he asked, looking at us +two.</p> +<p>"Hardly," Bertric answered, before I could do so in the same +word.</p> +<p>"Why not?"</p> +<p>"It is not to be supposed that we could leave our charge," he +answered.</p> +<p>"Forgive me; I forgot," said Dalfin at once.</p> +<p>But even that word had made Gerda pale with the thought that she +might be left alone, with the fear of our not returning for her. +She smiled at Bertric as he answered, and then asked if we should +not follow the brothers into the chapel, as we were told we might +do at any time, though this first service was not one for which she +and I might stay all the while.</p> +<p>So we went in, and there bided while we might. Presently we two +had to rise up and leave the place, unwillingly, so far as Gerda +was concerned. Phelim and I between us had told her the words of +the service.</p> +<p>Now we walked away together toward the shore, and were silent +for a time. It was plain that she thought deeply on somewhat. At +last she said sadly:</p> +<p>"What is to come is all dim and unknown, but if it does come to +pass that I may ever have home of my own again, I would that there +was one of these brothers to teach me and mine."</p> +<p>"That might easily be," I answered.</p> +<p>"They would not go to a heathen land?" she said in surprise.</p> +<p>"Maybe not these hermits, but some man like to them would. I +have heard them talk of men who are held in the greatest honour +because they have dared to do so."</p> +<p>Thereafter she said nothing, but in her face grew a great +content. We came to the shore and looked on the bare timbers of the +wreck, and with all my heart I would that they were not quite so +plain to be seen. The tides were slack now, and the water did not +hide them in the least, even at the full flood. Moreover it was +calm enough.</p> +<p>"Malcolm," she said presently, "do you and Bertric want to go +with the prince and see if there is fighting?"</p> +<p>She looked in my face quickly and half turned away, and I +wondered what she was thinking. For a moment I had a foolish +thought that mayhap she expected us to be full of longing for the +weapon play, and that to please her I might say somewhat which +would tend that way. But I bethought myself and answered her +frankly:</p> +<p>"I must speak for myself," I said; "but I think it will be the +same with Bertric. I have no mind to meddle with the affairs of +another man until I am sure that he needs my help. I cannot say +that I do not like a fair fight when there is good reason for it; +but there is no wisdom or courage in going out of the way to seek +for one."</p> +<p>So I laughed, and she laughed also, as relieved.</p> +<p>"I feared lest I held you back from the game you love," she +said.</p> +<p>"If we were alone--" I said, and there stopped, for I had said +too much. No doubt if she had not been here we should have been off +with Dalfin at once with light hearts.</p> +<p>"Then I do stay you," she said, catching my meaning.</p> +<p>Whereon it came to me that I had better say what I meant +outright.</p> +<p>"We need no better reason for staying. That we have you to care +for is good, and in that care is more honour to us than we might +win in fighting in a quarrel which is not ours."</p> +<p>"Little honour can you win here, Malcolm," she said half sadly, +and yet smiling. "Yet I know what you mean, and I thank you +both."</p> +<p>Now, a thought which had been growing up in my heart for these +many days came to the surface, as it were, and I had almost spoken +it. I knew that if this charge were taken from me I should be +lonely indeed, and that it were honour enough for me to care for +and guard Gerda through all my life as the one thing that I could +care for. I think that it would have been strange if this had not +come to me in these long hours of companionship with her, seeing +what she was in all respects, whether as she stood here on the +windy shore with her fair hair tossed by the sea breeze, fair and +full of health and life, or as I had seen her on the decks of the +doomed ship, brave and steadfast, with the cruel terror of the +pirates on her.</p> +<p>But here and now I could say nothing of this that was so near to +me. I had naught to offer her but my poor presence, no future, and +no home. And maybe there were long days of companionship and +service due from me, and I would not that there should be the least +thing said to mar the ease with which that went so far. One can be +wise at times, when the comfort of another is in the balance, as it +were.</p> +<p>Moreover, how could I tell that some of her longing for home +might not be also from pain of separation? And that was now no +happy thought to me. Well, I must wait and find out all that. If it +was in my power that longing should be stilled, and then I might +know the best and worst of all that might lie before me.</p> +<p>Thoughts like these do not grow up all at once as I have set +them down. At this time they seemed to gather from the many times +they had passed through my mind, and rank themselves against my +words. So it came to pass that I was silent, and was glad presently +that so I had been.</p> +<p>"Look!" said Gerda suddenly, pointing out to the far eastward, +"yonder are sails on the skyline."</p> +<p>Far off they were, but plain enough under the morning sun. Two +white specks on the blue circle's edge, sails of ships which sailed +westward, as if beating to windward in long boards against the +northeast breeze. They might be Norse vessels from Dublin on their +way homewards, though it had been more easy for such to wait a +slant from the south or west.</p> +<p>"They cannot be the ships which have caused the firing of the +beacons," I said. "That trouble was to the westward."</p> +<p>I half turned to look at the hills and their fires, and saw our +comrades coming to us. Dalfin was ahead, and plainly excited.</p> +<p>"Malcolm," he cried, so soon as he was within hearing, "I cannot +hold back if there is fighting in our land. Will you two take the +boat there and set me across to the mainland?"</p> +<p>I suppose that he had talked of this to Bertric as they came, +for the Saxon nodded to me.</p> +<p>"It will but take half an hour," he said. "Moreover, if we cross +we may learn what is amiss. What says the queen?"</p> +<p>"If the prince must go," she said, "I do not see how I can stay +him. I can sit and watch you there and back, and cannot feel +lonely. But need he go?"</p> +<p>"Faith," said Dalfin, laughing, "can a prince of Maghera sit +still when the fires are burning yonder to call him? That would be +a shame to him, and a wonder to his folk. I must go."</p> +<p>His eyes shone, and it was plain that even had we wished to do +so, we could not stay him. The place of the prince was with his +men, and he would return for us. Gerda smiled at his eagerness, and +bade him hasten to return, and so we went to where the boats lay in +the sand hills.</p> +<p>The larger had all her gear in her as we left it, and the +smaller, which was meant for three only, had but her oars. We took +this latter, as it was easy to get her to the water, and she was +all we needed.</p> +<p>"Go and get your arms," I said to Dalfin. "We will pull round +and meet you at the rock where the fishers landed."</p> +<p>"Hurry, then," he said, and went his way to the cells in all +haste.</p> +<p>More slowly Gerda followed him, and we pushed off and bent to +the oars. There was little sea, and we went swiftly from the open +round the eastern point of the island and into the strait.</p> +<p>Now I pointed out the distant sails to Bertric, but he had +already seen them.</p> +<p>"I do not rightly make out what they are yet," he said; "but I +do not think them Danish. Honest Norse traders from Dublin, most +likely."</p> +<p>It was at the time of the slack water at the top of high tide +now, and we found Dalfin and Gerda waiting with Phelim and another +of the brothers at the flat rock. At the first sight I thought the +prince had changed his mind, and would stay, as if Gerda had +over-persuaded him. For he stood there bare headed, and without +mail or shield, though he had the axe and sword which Gerda had +given him, and the great torque was on his neck.</p> +<p>"Where is the mail?" I asked, as we steadied the boat by the +rock.</p> +<p>"Waiting my return," he answered. "Today I am an Irish +prince--tomorrow the queen's courtman again, if she will.</p> +<p>"Now farewell, fathers."</p> +<p>He bent his knee to the priests, and then bowed over Gerda's +hand as he kissed it in parting.</p> +<p>"Forgive me, queen," he said. "The call of Eirinn must take me +from you for a time. It cannot be denied by me."</p> +<p>"Come back soon, and as a victor, and you will be forgiven," she +answered, laughing, and he stepped into the boat.</p> +<p>Then as he put off she sat down on a rock with the brethren +behind her, to watch us, and we saw her wave her hand in +farewell.</p> +<p>"Concerning the arms, or the want thereof," said Dalfin +presently. "Our folk hold that a warrior should need naught but his +weapons, and that mail or shield are but cowardly devices. So I +have had to leave them, though I am not of that mind myself. +Moreover, I shall be likely to find a long tramp across the hills +before me presently, and I have no mind to be set on by my own +people as a wandering Dane, for the sake of wearing outland arms to +please myself."</p> +<p>It was not a quarter of an hour before we were alongside the +little tottering landing stage which the fishers had built for +themselves of the ribs of some wreck at the foot of their glen. +Some of the children who swarmed in the village of huddled turf +huts caught sight of us first, and fled, yelling. Out of the huts +came their mothers in all haste to see what ailed them, and they +too saw and shrieked.</p> +<p>Whereon the men came running, each with a long-handled axe in +his hand, as if caught up from close by where each had been +working. Though they were wild and short of stature they were wiry +and active men, who might be good warriors if well led.</p> +<p>Dalfin leapt ashore and called to them, and they knew him, +welcoming him with a yell of delight, and crowding to do him noisy +homage. There were ten or fifteen of them, and it was some time +before the prince had a chance to make himself heard. When he +could, he called for the head man of the place, and one, with +fiery-red hair and beard, came and knelt before him to hear his +commands, while the rest drew back and stared, in a half circle. As +for us, we waited in the boat and laughed.</p> +<p>"What are all these beacon fires about?" asked Dalfin +shortly.</p> +<p>"Danes in the river Bann, lord," the head man said.</p> +<p>"Have they landed yet?"</p> +<p>"No, lord. They wait for ransom they have demanded. If it comes +not, they will burn and harry all Ulster."</p> +<p>"How many ships, then?" asked Dalfin, on hearing that +threat.</p> +<p>"Two ships, lord, and great ones."</p> +<p>The prince laughed at the man.</p> +<p>"What, burn all Ulster with two shiploads of men? That is a +great boast which we shall not care for. Where is my father, the +king--and where is the muster?"</p> +<p>The man told him that the king was at some place or other, with +the mustering warriors. Thereat Dalfin bade the man get him a horse +at once, and the fisher threw up his hands and said that there was +never a horse within ten miles. Dalfin laughed and spoke to us.</p> +<p>"Just what I thought," he said. "If I get to the muster by +sunset I shall be lucky, unless I meet with a horse on the way. +And--I am out of condition with these long days on board ship."</p> +<p>He groaned, and we bade him wait till he was sent for; but that +he would not hear.</p> +<p>"I shall take a dozen of these knaves as guard--and maybe to +carry me betimes. Wish me luck, for I must be going."</p> +<p>Now the wild fishers had been whispering among themselves, and +one of them made up his mind to tell somewhat. He came and knelt +before Dalfin, and asked him to forgive him.</p> +<p>"What for?" asked the prince.</p> +<p>"For telling foolishness," answered the man. "Yet I think it +should be told with the rest of the news."</p> +<p>"Tell it, then."</p> +<p>"I spoke with the man who carried the gathering cry, and he said +that the evil Lochlannoch, concerning whom are the beacons, have +bidden men give up the treasure which they say we must needs have +won from a certain wreck. There has been no wreck, lord, save +yours, and the prince will ever have treasure."</p> +<p>Now a sudden heat of rage seemed to fall on Dalfin, and he cried +aloud to the men:</p> +<p>"Hearken, fools! It is not to be said that the prince was +wrecked like a fisher churl. There has been no wreck--if there has +been, there was no treasure. Mind you that."</p> +<p>"Lord," said the man, trembling, "I cannot tell if aught was +told the Lochlannoch. We have said naught to them, not having seen +them."</p> +<p>"Dalfin," I said, with a great chill on me, "ask if they know +the name of the leader of these men."</p> +<p>He changed colour, for I think that the knowledge of what I +feared came to him in a flash. He asked, and the man at his feet +muttered what was meant for the name of Heidrek. He said it once or +twice, stammering, but I knew it, and Bertric caught it also.</p> +<p>"What is it that the man says?" he asked quickly. He had been +content to wait until presently to hear what the news was, until +this came to his ears.</p> +<p>"What you feared," I answered. "Heidrek treasure hunting."</p> +<p>Dalfin turned to us now, and his face was troubled.</p> +<p>"Malcolm," he said, "you have heard all this. It is a mere +chance if Heidrek has not heard of the wreck by this time. Now, it +will be best for you to bring Gerda across here at once, and so let +these men take you to a hiding in the hills. I will come back +swiftly with men and horses and take you thence. Make the hermits +come also, if you can--but they will not."</p> +<p>Then he spoke to the fishers and told them that they had to do +this, at the same time bidding some get provender and be ready to +go with him instantly. That pleased them well enough, and a dozen +ran to the huts to find what was needed. I heard the women scolding +them.</p> +<p>"Farewell, friends," he said, coming alongside again, and taking +our hands with a great grip. "I left Ireland to find adventure, +and, faith, I have not been disappointed. Now, the sooner I am away +the sooner I will be back."</p> +<p>"Good luck to you," we cried; and he shouted for his ragged men, +and was away up the glen.</p> +<p>Behind the little straggling crowd the women came out and wept +and howled as if not one would be back again. It was their way of +sending their men off in good spirits, I suppose. Not that the men +heeded the noise at all, being used to it. One looked back and +grinned.</p> +<p>The few men left lingered on the shore, and I called one to +me.</p> +<p>"We shall be back here shortly with the young queen," I said. +"You will be ready for us."</p> +<p>"As the word of the prince bade us," he answered. "It will be +done."</p> +<p>We pulled away, and it was time. The falling tide was setting +westward through the strait, and we had to row more or less against +it now as we crossed to where Gerda's white dress shone on the +farther shore.</p> +<p>"Heidrek will not risk a landing," Bertric said. "The sooner we +are back here with Gerda the better. He has heard of that +wreck."</p> +<p>I told him the words of the fishers, and he was the more sure of +it. We pulled on the faster therefore, and the light boat flew as +only a Norse-built boat can fly.</p> +<p>Bertric was in the forward rower's place, steering, and now and +again he turned his head to set the course. I suppose we had +covered half the distance across, when I heard him draw in his +breath sharply.</p> +<p>"Holy saints," he said, "look yonder!"</p> +<p>He was staring toward the westward mouth of the strait, half a +mile away. There was a long black boat there, and the sun sparkled +on the arms of the men in her. They were rowing slowly against the +tide, toward us.</p> +<p>"Too late," said Bertric between his teeth. "That is Heidrek +treasure hunting, and we shall not get back to the mainland."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch12" id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: With Sail And +Oar.</h2> +<p>I looked over my shoulder at Gerda. Her white dress seemed to +shine in the morning sun like silver against some dark bushes, and +my first fear was that it could be seen as plainly by the men in +the big boat down the strait.</p> +<p>"It cannot be Heidrek's," I groaned.</p> +<p>"I know that boat only too well," answered Bertric; "pull, if +you never pulled before."</p> +<p>The oars bent, and the water boiled round the blades. Bertric +headed straight across, letting the tide have its way with us. In +five minutes we were ashore a hundred yards below where Gerda sat, +and then I knew that the bushes must screen her from the view of +those who came from the sea. We leapt out and looked at the boat we +feared. The men in her did not seem to be heeding us, for, at all +events, they had not quickened their stroke. They were keeping over +on the far shore. Either they had not seen us, or took us for no +more than fishers--or else knew that they had us trapped if they +wanted us.</p> +<p>"Give me a lift here," said Bertric, going to a great stone +which was a load for any two men. "We must sink this boat--we have +the other, if that is any good to us."</p> +<p>Together we hove the great stone into the boat as it rocked on +the edge of the tide, starting a plank or two. I stove in one +altogether with an oar, shoved her off with all my might, and saw +her fill at once, and sink with the weight in her some twenty yards +from shore. She would not be seen again till dead low water. Then +we hove the oars into the bushes. Maybe it was all useless, but we +would leave nothing to be spied which might bring the men to the +island sooner than needful.</p> +<p>That took only a few minutes, but in them I cannot tell how many +wild plans for Gerda's safety went through my mind. Beyond the bare +chance which lay in getting to the hillside and trying to keep out +of sight of the men when they landed, there seemed to be nothing we +could do.</p> +<p>Now, along the little shore path came Gerda to seek us, smiling +at our haste. The boat she missed at once, and looked round for +it.</p> +<p>"Why, what has become of the boat?" she asked. "I thought you +landed here."</p> +<p>Bertric looked at me, and I at him, and Gerda caught the +glance.</p> +<p>"There is something which you fear to tell me," she said +steadily. "Let it be spoken at once, for we have faced danger +together ere this, have we not?"</p> +<p>"Have you not seen a large boat down the strait?" I asked +lamely.</p> +<p>"No," she said, and was stepping forward to the edge of the +water, past the screen of low shore bushes to look, but I stayed +her.</p> +<p>"It is the boat which we fear," I said. "There are Danes in her, +and we think they are seeking the wreck."</p> +<p>She looked me in the face for a moment, and read what was +written there.</p> +<p>"We might welcome the coming of honest Vikings," she said, +"whether Dane or Norse. They know how to befriend a woman who needs +help. These men whom you fear and who seek the wreck can only be +the men of our enemy."</p> +<p>Then Bertric said:</p> +<p>"I cannot mistake the boat which I have helped to pull so many a +weary time. It is Heidrek's. He has followed us, and has somewhere +heard of the fate of the ship. We have sunk the little boat, lest +the sight of it should bring them ashore straightway."</p> +<p>"Then we must hide somewhere," she said, looking round her as if +to see what place might be.</p> +<p>"Aye, we must hide. There will be fifteen men, or more, in the +boat. Malcolm and I cannot stay their landing."</p> +<p>Gerda caught her breath suddenly. "What of the hermits?" she +said.</p> +<p>"We waste time," said I. "Come and let us tell them. They may +have some hiding place."</p> +<p>Then we went swiftly to the cells. Once we looked back to the +strait, from the little rise behind which the cells were sheltered, +and saw the boat still working against the tide along the far +shore. Heidrek had certainly not heard that the wreck was on the +island itself. Most likely it was thought that we had made for the +shelter of the strait, and had gone ashore in trying to reach it. +Unless the ship which we had seen knew the coast well, her crew +could hardly have told that an island was here.</p> +<p>There were no hermits to be seen, for they were either in their +cells, or at their tasks about the place. So I went to the first +cell and looked in, and finding it empty, went to the next. Fergus +sat there, writing in some beautiful book which he was busied with. +One never found a brother idle.</p> +<p>"Father," I said, "I must disturb you. There is danger at hand, +I fear."</p> +<p>"Ah," he answered, setting down his pen, and rising hastily. +"The Danes at last. Well, we have long expected them to come to us, +as to our brethren elsewhere. But what shall the poor queen +do?"</p> +<p>"Is there no place where you can hide her?" I said.</p> +<p>"None," he answered gloomily. "Tell me more."</p> +<p>I told him, and he shook his head.</p> +<p>"Men in the narrow waters, and men in the open," he muttered. +"Hemmed in on every side."</p> +<p>"Danes in the open sea?" I said, with a new fear on me. The end +might be nearer than we deemed it.</p> +<p>"Aye, two ships sailing this way."</p> +<p>They were those which we had seen and forgotten. I ran out, and +while Fergus went to Bertric, climbed the little hill beyond the +village, and looked seaward. The ships were six miles away, and +heading due west, having edged somewhat farther from the shore than +when we first sighted them. They were not coming hither.</p> +<p>"There need be no fear of those ships, father," I said. "They +are making a passage past us--bound elsewhere at all events."</p> +<p>"Then," he said at once, "there lies your boat on the shore of +the open sea. Make away to the main land eastward while there is +time, and take to the hills inland. You are not likely to be +followed thither. We will give you some token which the poor folk +of the shore will know."</p> +<p>Now, while the hermit had been speaking, I was translating for +the other two, as was my way by this time.</p> +<p>"Father," cried Gerda, and I spoke her words as she said them, +"will you not fly also?"</p> +<p>He shook his head with a sad smile. Neither he nor any one of +his brethren would leave the place.</p> +<p>"We shall hide in the hill and behind it while we may," he said. +"They may not trouble to hunt us."</p> +<p>"The good father is right," said Bertric. "We must get away as +soon as we can. It is our one chance. I had thought of it, but was +not sure how the shore folk would greet us. Now we must hasten. Ask +the hermit to come and help us launch the boat."</p> +<p>Then he turned to Gerda, who stood with clasped hands waiting to +hear the end of the rapid speech.</p> +<p>"It is our only hope," he said again. "We must take that way, +though it is hard to leave these holy men to their fate."</p> +<p>Then, of a sudden, a light came into Gerda's eyes, and she +flushed as with a fresh hope.</p> +<p>"Those other ships!" she cried. "You said they were not Danish. +Norse or Irish, they would help us, if we could reach them!"</p> +<p>Bertric said never a word, but ran to the place whence he could +look out to sea, and came back with a brighter face.</p> +<p>"They are not Danish," he said. "I am sure thereof. And it is +just a chance that we might reach them. If they see we are in need, +there is another hope for us, for they will meet us, or heave to +for us."</p> +<p>Then some fear took hold of Gerda, born of the chase by Heidrek, +as I believe.</p> +<p>"No," she said, "rather the poor folk ashore than chance what +men we may meet at sea."</p> +<p>"As you will," answered Bertric. "You may be right. Now will you +gather what you must needs take, and that swiftly? Malcolm and I +will get our arms."</p> +<p>She went to her cell, and Fergus hurried to call his brethren. +We two went to the cell which had been given us.</p> +<p>"Just as well not to put them on," I said. "We have a long pull +before us, and if armed men are seen in the boat we must be +chased."</p> +<p>The casket of gold was under the heather pillow of my bed, and I +dragged it out. From it we took what we could stow away on us in +one way or another, and then, with our war gear bundled in our +arms, went out.</p> +<p>Across the strait rose a thick smoke from the foot of the glen. +Heidrek's folk were burning the wretched huts for sport. All the +fisher people would have fled at their first coming.</p> +<p>"They are busy now," said Bertric grimly, nodding toward the +signs of pillage. "They will be here next."</p> +<p>Now Gerda came with a little bundle, wrapped in her blue cloak. +She was pale, and near to weeping as she looked on the hermits, who +were coming together from their work to the black cross in the +midst of their home. The old superior caught sight of me and called +to me in his still voice.</p> +<p>"So you must fly, my son," he said. "I would that we had had +more speech together. Give this to the lady who has listened to me +so patiently. Now, I have bidden Fergus and Phelim to go with you. +They can row, and that well, and you need help. Aye, I ken the ways +of the boatwork well enough. You will make them go with you, for +hardly will they obey me, now at the last."</p> +<p>Thereat those two brethren threw themselves at the feet of the +old man, and besought him to let them bide with the rest for that +crown of martyrdom which they might gain.</p> +<p>"No, my sons," he said sternly, and yet lovingly; "your lives +may yet be of use. Ours are done. Now you shall win more by saving +the lives of these friends of ours who came to us in need than by +losing your own."</p> +<p>Then he bent toward them, and spoke rapidly in the Latin tongue, +and I saw their faces change, and they rose up. Thereafter they had +no more to say of staying, though at the time I could not tell what +the words which wrought this change might be. Without another word +they took Bertric's arms and mine and Gerda's little pack, and +started for the shore, and as they went the old man smiled as if +content. Then he bent toward us.</p> +<p>"Go, my children," he said; "you have no moment to waste longer. +It has been good to speak with you."</p> +<p>Now I set that which he had given me in Gerda's hand. It was a +little black crucifix carven of the bog oak by one of the brothers +who was skilful at that work. She took it with a flushing face.</p> +<p>"Malcolm," she said, "tell him that we will not forget."</p> +<p>So I told him, and he smiled, saying nothing in answer. I dare +say he knew that Gerda would not do so, if he had less hopes for +myself. Gerda first, and then we two in turn, bent and kissed his +thin hand, and he blessed us, and we must needs go.</p> +<p>Across the sand hills we went, keeping out of sight of the +opposite shore, and I looked back once and saw that the little +black-robed group was moving away up the glen. One brother was +coming from the chapel with a burden, which, no doubt, was the case +containing the holy vessels.</p> +<p>"Four of us to pull, and Gerda to steer," said Bertric, whose +spirits, like my own, were rising. "We should do well. These +brothers, moreover, know where we can land, which was the +difficulty I most feared. They are terrible cliff walls +yonder."</p> +<p>"How far must we go before we can find a landing?" I asked +Phelim on this.</p> +<p>"Some five miles or more," he said, after a little thought. +"There is a cove and beach at the foot of a valley. The fishers +took me there once to help a sick man. I can find the place."</p> +<p>So it seemed that a village lay there also, which was good +hearing, for the sake of Gerda, even if it were naught but of turf +huts. Thence we could send a message to Dalfin.</p> +<p>Now, while we spoke thus, we were getting the boat down to the +water quickly enough between the four of us. She was very light for +her size, and we had all her gear in her already. There was room in +her for four rowers and two passengers aft, and I dare say might +have carried two more at a pinch. With the five of us she would be +in her best trim, therefore, and we might well distance a larger +boat if it was overladen at all. But the boat we fled from was not +to be seen now, even from the higher sand hills. Some rise in the +island hid her, or else she was well over to this shore.</p> +<p>The brothers cast off their long, black robes now, and stowed +them in the bows of the boat with our gear. They had thick woollen +tunics, like those of the fishers, under them, and their arms were +bare, and sinewy with long toil with spade and hoe, for these two +were the working brothers in field and garden.</p> +<p>We helped Gerda into the stern sheets, and pushed off, splashing +knee deep into the water as we ran the boat out among the waves. +Then we took our places and headed straight out to sea, across the +broken water where the reef lay still well covered, and so into the +long, steady seaway of the offing. Then we turned eastward for the +long row which was before us, and settled down to the work, Bertric +rowing the stroke oar, with myself next him, and the brothers in +the bows.</p> +<p>The boat travelled swiftly and easily, so that Phelim praised +her as the best he had ever known. He had come from some burnt +monastery on Lough Neagh, where the boat was in constant use, +whether for fishing or travelling to the cells round the +shores.</p> +<p>Soon we opened up the mouth of the strait, and looked anxiously +for Heidrek's boat along the shore, whence the smoke rose still +thicker and more black from the burning turf huts of the fishing +village. It was not to be seen in that direction, and we thought +for the moment that the men had already crossed to the island, +whose strand we could not see until we were well off the mouth.</p> +<p>A dozen more strokes of the oars and we saw it, and were +ourselves seen at the same moment. Whether the men had caught some +fisher and had heard where the wreck lay, or whether they had seen +the bare ribs of the ship from the far shore I do not know, and it +is of little account. But whatever had led them this way, they were +close on us, pulling leisurely toward the end of the island past +which we were going, as if to round it to the wreck. They were not +more than a quarter of a mile from us, and had been hidden under +the near shore.</p> +<p>One of the men in her stern pointed to us, and the rowers +stopped and turned to look. Then a great hail came over the water, +bidding us hold on and wait. She was full of men, pulling five oars +a side, with six or eight in the bows and stern.</p> +<p>We said nothing, but held on quickly. Bertric never hastened the +long stroke he was setting us, but we put more power into it +without need of bidding. Heidrek's men watched us for a short +space, and then made up their minds to chase us, no doubt seeing +that this could only be one of the wrecked ship's boats, and making +sure that we had the treasure on board.</p> +<p>They ran the boat ashore hastily, and some of the men landed, +hurrying across the narrow head of the island toward the wreck, +while the rest put off again. Now there were but two men in the +stern, and the ten rowers bent to their work and were after us. We +could see that they were all armed, and the sun flashed from the +bright helms as they rose and fell at the work.</p> +<p>Phelim saw the men cross the island and groaned, fearing that +when they found nothing on the beach or in the sand hills they +would pass on to the village at once. But, like ourselves when we +first came ashore, they had no knowledge that a village was there, +and it was not to be seen as it nestled in its little valley. So +they bided on the shore and watched the chase as it began.</p> +<p>By the time that the big boat was after us in earnest, we had +set a full half mile between us and it, owing to the little delay +in landing the men. Then they hailed us again, but though we heard +the hail we paid no heed to it. So for a little while we held on, +until it was plain that the ten oars must needs wear down our four, +and then we stepped the mast and made sail, at least holding our +own under it and the oars. The northeast breeze was helping us, +though we must sail close-hauled, and my only fear was lest the +pursuers should do the same. But they had no sail with them.</p> +<p>Now we held on thus for a matter of two miles, and neither of +the boats seemed to gain much on the other. It began to come into +my mind that we should win after all, if only we did not tire too +soon. They had two fresh men, who could take their turn presently. +And then it came across me that even if we ran ashore before they +reached us, we should hardly have time to get away before they, +too, were on the beach. The fisher folk, if there were any huts at +the landing place, might all be away at the muster, and no aid +might be waiting us.</p> +<p>I know that all these things went through the mind of my comrade +at this time, and from the troubled look on the face of Gerda as +she steered, it was plain that she, too, had her doubts as to the +end of this race. Then Bertric spoke to me over his shoulder.</p> +<p>"We had better head seaward after all," he said. "What think you +of our chance of reaching yon ships before we are overhauled? We +shall be caught before we reach a landing, or else taken on the +very beach, as we go now."</p> +<p>I looked at the two strange ships. They were three miles from +shore, and perhaps at the same distance from us eastward, still +heading west and a little out to sea.</p> +<p>"It is our best plan," I answered. "We shall get the wind abeam, +and ought to sail away from that great boat. It may be a choice of +two evils, but one cannot well meet with another Heidrek."</p> +<p>"We must cut across their course and try to hail them," said +Bertric, somewhat wearily. "It all depends on how the boat sails on +the wind, and if we can keep the oars going. What say you, Queen +Gerda?"</p> +<p>"Do as you think best," she answered bravely. "I know how this +boat can sail, and I will answer for her. And I can see no sign of +a break in these black cliffs for many a long mile ahead."</p> +<p>Now Bertric turned and took a long look at the ships, and his +face was half toward me. He seemed puzzled.</p> +<p>"It is hardly possible," he muttered to me, "but I could almost +swear that they were English. If not, they are Frisian. But what +could have brought either into these seas? Have we taken to the +Viking path?"</p> +<p>"No," I answered, "the Vikings have taken them."</p> +<p>He gave a short laugh and bade me and Phelim lower the sail and +hoist it afresh for the new tack, while he and Fergus pulled on. +Gerda put the boat about into the wind and it was soon done. Astern +the enemy howled, thinking that we had given up, for the moment. +Then the sail filled, and the boat heeled to the breeze abeam, and +we headed out to sea, taking as wide a sweep as we could, lest we +should give the foe too much advantage in the change of course.</p> +<p>As it was, they seemed to gain hand over hand for a while, but +they had to pull dead to windward in following us as we went off at +an angle to the old course. Then we began to draw ahead steadily, +and they hailed us with threats which made Gerda pale somewhat, for +if we were still too far for the words to be heard there was no +mistaking them. But her faith in the boat was justified, for she +sailed wonderfully well with the beam wind. The big rowing boat +astern began to go somewhat to leeward also, with the set of wind +and wave and the tide together on her high side.</p> +<p>Now I glanced at the island which was lessening fast astern. I +could make out that the men were still on the beach, searching, as +it seemed, for what they might pick up of value from the wreck. The +hermits were safe so far, and I told Gerda so in a word or two, and +she smiled for the first time since we put off from shore. Her fear +for our kind hosts passed from her for the moment.</p> +<p>We covered a mile or more in silence after that, tugging grimly +at the oars, with a wary eye on the waves as they came. It was well +for us that they were long and even, with little way in the heads +of them. The sail, too, steadied the boat, and the hermits rowed +well and evenly. But ever astern of us those ten oars rose and +fell, unfaltering, until I grew dazed with the flash of the +steadily-swung blades. Then I looked at the iron shore, and saw the +long lines of cruel cliffs with the white foam at their feet, +seeming endless. There may have been a cove in sight, but I could +not make it out, and anywise it must have been too far for us.</p> +<p>Then I looked at Gerda, and saw that there was some trouble in +her face as she looked forward. Once she smiled as if to cheer the +hermit brothers, and at that I felt the lift of the boat that comes +with a fresh life set into the swing on the oar, and that told me +somewhat. Fergus was failing. Behind me, Phelim, the younger and +stronger man, was still breathing deeply and easily, and I had no +fear of his failing yet.</p> +<p>Then I grew certain that the enemy was gaining. We had held our +own up till this time, but barely. Gerda's lips tightened, and she +had to meet the pull of Bertric and Phelim, lest they should +overpower us. I did my best and she knew it, and kept the balance +for a while, until I must needs speak.</p> +<p>"Bertric," I said quietly, and in the Norse, "the bow oar is +failing. Pull easy on your side for a little."</p> +<p>He did so, and the enemy crept nearer.</p> +<p>"Half a mile more," said Gerda. "Only half a mile--and we can +hail the ships."</p> +<p>Bertric looked back, and his face brightened.</p> +<p>"We may do it yet," he said; "and they are English-built +ships."</p> +<p>Now I cried to Phelim in the Gaelic that we had but a half mile +more, and I felt the flagging oar of Fergus take up the work +afresh, with a swifter swirl of the water round its blade as he +pulled, while Phelim muttered words in Latin which doubtless were +of thanks. I heard him name one Clement, who, as I have heard +since, is the patron saint of seamen. The boat leapt and quivered +again as she fled toward safety.</p> +<p>Now I had looked to see the pursuers give up the chase as we +neared the ships, but they did not, and a cold fear came over me. +Maybe these were known friends of Heidrek's. Then I thought that if +so they might as well leave the matter to be ended by them. We +should be helpless directly if so. But it seemed rather that they +quickened the pace. They would not share the treasure with +anyone.</p> +<p>There was a sound as of a groan from the bows, and the boat +swung aside before Gerda could meet her with the helm. An oar +flashed past me on a wave, and Phelim shipped his oar with a +smothered cry. Fergus had fainted at last. I heard the sharp howl +of delight from the men astern as they saw that, but Bertric and I +never ceased pulling.</p> +<p>And suddenly Gerda's face lit up with a new hope, and she +pointed to the ships and cried to us to look.</p> +<p>"The leading ship is heading for us," she said breathlessly. +"She has just paid off from the wind and is coming swiftly."</p> +<p>Another moment and she cried that they had run up somewhat red +to the masthead, and at that Bertric called to me, and he ceased +pulling. He turned on the thwart and looked, and his eyes gleamed +in his pale face. Then he rose up and set his hands to his mouth, +and sent a great hail to the ship:</p> +<p>"Ahoy! Hakon Haraldsson, ahoy! Hakon! Hakon!"</p> +<p>The ship was near enough for her men to hear that. I saw a man +on her high bows lift his hand in the silent answer of the seaman +who hears and understands a hail, and I saw a red shield, blazoned +with a golden lion, at the masthead. Then Bertric sat down and +laughed as if he could not cease.</p> +<p>"It is Hakon, Athelstane's foster son, on the way to win Norway +for himself. Alfred taught us how to build ships like that."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch13" id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: Athelstane's Foster +Son.</h2> +<p>We laid in the oars now and watched the pursuers. They had not +the least chance of overhauling us before we were picked up by the +ship, and they knew it. Still they were pulling after us, and one +of the men in the stern hailed once or twice, making signs that we +were to be taken by the ships. I thought that the figure seemed +like that of Asbiorn, as I had seen him on the stern after I went +overboard, but I could not be sure. Our boat slipped along fast, +and his crew were not hurrying so much at this time.</p> +<p>I looked back at the ships, and they were worth a second glance. +I had never seen such splendid vessels, for they were higher and +longer than any which sailed our northern waters, while their lines +were clean cut and graceful as those of the little ship which had +brought us hither so well--Thorwald's favourite cutter.</p> +<p>Now Bertric lifted up his head, for he had been finding his +breath again after that last despairing pull, and he looked to the +westward and pointed without a word. Round a great point which +barred the view beyond the island came two ships, and their sails +were brown. They were Heidrek's, and no doubt were looking for +their boat. The men left on the island saw them at about the same +time, and lit a fire to show where they were. They had not gone +from the sand hills yet.</p> +<p>"Heidrek is running into danger," Bertric said grimly.</p> +<p>The enemy hailed again at that moment. I could hear now that +they cried to the ship that we had their boat--that we were Irish +knaves who had stolen it and all that was in it. It is quite likely +that they honestly thought us such, but never wondered why Irishry +should seek refuge with these ships.</p> +<p>Now the leading vessel was close on us. I could hear the hum of +the wind in her broad sail and rigging, and the wash of the waves +round her sharp bows. Then a tall young man came and looked at us +from her high foredeck, and lifted his hand. The ship luffed and +waited for us. As we slid alongside into the still water under her +lee, he cried to us:</p> +<p>"Who knows Hakon, and calls on him?"</p> +<p>"An old comrade--Bertric of Lyme."</p> +<p>Hakon stared at Bertric under his hand for a moment, and +laughed.</p> +<p>"And so it is!" he cried. "Well met, old friend; but what is +that boat astern of you, and why were you in so desperate a +hurry?"</p> +<p>"Needs must hurry when the worst pirate in the North Sea is +after one. We have escaped once before from him--from Heidrek the +Seafarer."</p> +<p>One or two men were beside Hakon, watching us curiously. One +whistled when he heard that name, and spoke quickly to Hakon, who +nodded. Then a line came uncoiling in the air from the ship to us, +and across the huddled body of his comrade Phelim caught it, while +I lowered the sail. He made it fast in the bows, and then bent over +his brother, setting him more easily against the thwart. He had not +dared shift his place to help him before, lest he should alter the +sailing trim of the boat, and that must have been hard for him.</p> +<p>The men took the line astern, and the great ship paid off from +the wind. We swung astern of her, wondering what this meant. I +could hear Heidrek's men shouting, but I could not see how near +they were, for the ship hid them.</p> +<p>The next moment told me. I saw, as I looked past the long black +side of the ship, the bow of the boat come into view. A man stood +up in it with his hand stretched out in a strange way, and I heard +a yell. Then the boat was gone, and past us drifted oars and +crushed planking, and a helm floating like an upturned bowl. She +had been run down.</p> +<p>Close by the bows of our boat a head came to the surface, and +the face was turned to us. I knew it, for it was that of Asbiorn +Heidreksson, and in a flash I minded that once I said that the day +might come when I could repay him for letting us go--saving our +lives, rather. He had his full mail on him, and was sinking, when I +gripped his hair and held it. Then he got his hands on the gunwale +and stared at us.</p> +<p>Gerda had hidden her face in her hands, for he was not the only +one who had been swept past us. There were still cries, which rang +in my ears, from men who were sinking as we passed on.</p> +<p>Bertric felt the boat lurch, and looked round. He saw the head +above the gunwale, and the clutching hands on it, and reached for +his oar.</p> +<p>"Hold hard!" I cried, staying the thrust which was coming. "It +is Asbiorn!"</p> +<p>He dropped the oar again with a short laugh.</p> +<p>"Lucky for him that so it is," he said; "but I am glad you saved +him."</p> +<p>"It is not to be supposed that I am welcome," said Asbiorn, +mighty coolly; "but on my word I did not know it was you whom I was +chasing. You ought to be in Shetland. Now, if you think this a +mistake, I will let go."</p> +<p>"Well," said Bertric, "you are the only man of your crews whom +we could make welcome. Get to the stern and we will help you into +the boat."</p> +<p>He shifted his hands along the gunwale and we got him on board, +while Gerda looked on in a sort of silent terror at all that had +happened in that few minutes. There was a row of faces watching us +over the rail of the ship by this time, and now Hakon came aft.</p> +<p>"Why," he said, "you have a lady with you. I had not seen that +before. We will get you alongside."</p> +<p>So it came to pass that in five minutes more we were on the +deck, and some of Hakon's men were helping Phelim to get his +still-swooning brother on board. There were a dozen men of rank +round us at once, with Hakon at their head. There were not so many +warriors to be seen as one might have expected, but all were picked +men and well armed.</p> +<p>As for Hakon himself, I have never seen a more handsome young +man. He was about seventeen at this time, and might have been taken +for three years older, being tall and broad of shoulder, with the +wonderful yellow hair and piercing eyes of his father Harald, whom +he was most like, as all men knew. It was certain that he did the +great English king, Athelstane, who had fostered him, credit, for +he was in all ways most kinglike even now.</p> +<p>He took off the blue cap he wore as he went to meet Gerda, and +greeted her with all courtesy, asking to know her name. She +answered him frankly, though it was plain that the gaze of all the +strange faces disquieted her.</p> +<p>"I am Gerda, granddaughter of that Thorwald who was a king in +the south lands in the time of your great father, King Hakon," she +said. "I have been wrecked here with these friends, who have cared +for me, and now will ask for your help."</p> +<p>"They will tell me all the story," said Hakon. "Now, I hold that +I am lucky, for Thorwald has ever been a friend of our house."</p> +<p>"Thorwald is dead," she answered in a low voice, which shook +somewhat. "I am the only child of the line left."</p> +<p>"Why, then, I am still happy in being hailed as king by Queen +Gerda here and now.</p> +<p>"It is a good omen, friends, is it not?"</p> +<p>He turned to the nobles round us with a bright smile, and they +laughed and said that none could be better. But one, a very tall +man, older than most there, spoke to one of the courtmen hard by, +and sent him aft with some message. Then he went to Gerda and asked +if she did not remember him.</p> +<p>"You were a little thing, though, when I came with your father +to Thorwald's hall," he said; "mayhap you do not recall it, but we +were good friends then for a week or two. You have changed less +than I."</p> +<p>Gerda looked shyly at him, and at last smiled.</p> +<p>"I remember," she said. "You are Thoralf the Tall."</p> +<p>Now, from aft came two ladies hastily, brought by Thoralf's +message, from the after cabin under the raised deck of the ship, +and the little throng parted to let them reach us. One was the wife +of this Thoralf, and the other his daughter, and they looked +pityingly at Gerda as they came, with all kindness in their faces. +And when the elder lady saw that she seemed distressed at all the +notice paid her, she took Gerda into her arms as might a mother, +and so drew her away with her to her own place gently, with words +of welcome. And that was a load off my mind, for I knew that Gerda +was in good hands at last.</p> +<p>Hakon watched them go gravely, and then turned to Bertric and +greeted him as an old and most welcome friend, and so Bertric made +me known, and I also was well greeted. Then Hakon turned to +Asbiorn, who stood by, watching all this quietly.</p> +<p>"Who is this prisoner of yours, Malcolm?" he asked. "You have +not taken his sword from him, as I see."</p> +<p>"He is Asbiorn Heidreksson, King Hakon," I answered. "I cannot +call him a prisoner, for I owe my own life to him, and freedom +also. He saved me from his father's men."</p> +<p>"And let you go thereafter. I see," answered Hakon.</p> +<p>"Do you know aught of this Viking, Earl Osric?"</p> +<p>This was the chief to whom Hakon had spoken before the boat was +run down. He had told the young king that which had led him to +crush her as if her crew were vermin, and wondered to see us save +one of them.</p> +<p>"I have heard much of Heidrek, seeing that I am a Northumbrian," +he said. "The track of that ruffian lies black on our coasts; but I +have not heard of his son. We have naught against his name, at +least."</p> +<p>Then said Bertric: "I sailed as a thrall with yon ships for six +months or more, and have naught against Asbiorn here. He is the +only one of all the crew who follow Heidrek of whom I could say as +much."</p> +<p>"Faith!" said Asbiorn, with a grave face, "it is somewhat to +have no sort of character at all, as it seems."</p> +<p>Hakon looked at him and laughed a little.</p> +<p>"Take service with me and make a good name for yourself," he +said. "It is a pity to see a good warrior who will do a kindly turn +to a captive naught but a wolf's-head Viking. I have need of +courtmen."</p> +<p>"I might do worse," he answered; "but hither comes my father, +and I have no mind to fight him at the very beginning of my +service."</p> +<p>Hakon looked at the two ships, which were nearing us fast, +though we were still close-hauled, as when the boat was brought +alongside.</p> +<p>"I had no mind to fight him," said Hakon.</p> +<p>"It is not his way to let a ship pass without either toll or +battle," Asbiorn said bluntly.</p> +<p>"Why, then, go forward and get dried," Hakon said. "We will +speak of this presently, after we have met your ships."</p> +<p>Thereon Asbiorn ungirt his sword and gave it to me solemnly.</p> +<p>"It is in my mind that this might get loose when our men come +over the side," he said. "Better that I am your captive for a +while."</p> +<p>With that he walked forward, and Hakon looked after him with a +smile that was somewhat grim. Then someone touched my arm, and +there was Father Phelim, with a face full of trouble. With him were +two men, dressed in somewhat the same way as himself. They were +Hakon's English chaplains, and they could not understand his +Erse.</p> +<p>"Malcolm," he said, "what of our brethren on the island? There +are the wild Danes yet there--on the shore. I can see them."</p> +<p>Hakon asked with some concern what was amiss with the hermit, +and I told him, adding that they had only too much reason to fear +the Danes. And when he heard he turned to Earl Osric, who seemed to +be his shipmaster, and asked him to send a boat with men enough to +take these Danes, if possible, and anywise to see that the hermits +came to no harm.</p> +<p>"If we are to fight this Heidrek," the earl said doubtfully, +"you will want us all. We are not over-manned."</p> +<p>Nor were they. The ship pulled five-and-thirty oars a side, but +had no more than two men to each, instead of the full fighting +number, which should be three--one to row, one to shield the rower, +and one to fight or relieve. King Athelstane had given Hakon these +ships and sailing crews, but could not find Norsemen for him. Those +who were here had been picked up from the Norse towns in Ireland, +where many men of note waited for his coming. Eric, his half +brother, was not loved in Norway.</p> +<p>Presently I learned that Hakon was steering westward thus in +order to find that ship which we had seen when we were wrecked. It +belonged to some friend of his cause.</p> +<p>But Hakon would have the hermits protected, and Osric manned our +boat and sent it away, bidding the men hasten. They had a two-mile +sail to the island now, but the Danes stood and watched the coming +of the boat as if unconcerned. Doubtless they had not seen what +happened to their comrades, and thought they were returning.</p> +<p>"Tell me about these ships," Hakon said to Bertric when the boat +had gone. "Is there to be fighting, as this Asbiorn says?"</p> +<p>"Heidrek will not fight without surety of gain," my comrade +answered. "His ships are full of men, but he cannot tell that you +are under-manned. He can see that he must needs lose heavily in +boarding, for you have the advantage in height of side. I doubt if +he will chance it. There is an Irish levy waiting ashore for him, +and he has not faced that--or has been driven off."</p> +<p>"Rid the seas of him," growled Earl Osric. "Get to windward of +him and run his ships down, and have done."</p> +<p>"There is not a seaman in the North Sea who will not thank you +if you do so," said Bertric. "Those two ships are a pest."</p> +<p>"See to it, Osric," answered Hakon.</p> +<p>Then he glanced at us and saw our arms lying at our feet, for +his men had brought them from the boat.</p> +<p>"I was going to offer to arm you, but there is no need. Bertric +and I have drawn sword together against Danes before now, but I do +not know whether Malcolm may not owe some fealty to Eric, my half +brother. I am going to try to turn him out of Norway--as men have +begged me to do--and I would sooner have you on my side than +against me."</p> +<p>"Thanks, King Hakon," I answered. "I have owned no king as yet. +My sword is yours to command; but first I have promised to see +Queen Gerda into safety, at least, in Norway, if her home may not +be won again for her."</p> +<p>Hakon laughed, as if pleased enough.</p> +<p>"I think you have done the first already," he said. "As for the +winning her home afresh, who knows if you may not be in a fair way +to do so from this moment? It is likely."</p> +<p>"Hakon does not forget the friends of the house of Harald," +Thoralf the Tall said. "Tell him all the tale presently, for there +seems to be one, and be content."</p> +<p>"It would be strange if I were not," I answered.</p> +<p>Hakon held out his hand to me and I took it, and thereby pledged +myself to help set him on the Norse throne. It was a hazardous, and +perhaps hopeless errand on which he was setting forth, but I did +not stay to weigh all that. I knew that at least I had found a +leader who was worth following, and who had claimed friendship with +Gerda from the first.</p> +<p>Maybe there was another thought mixed up with all this. I will +not say that it might not have had the first place. Gerda was in +Hakon's care now, and I would not be far from her.</p> +<p>Now, there was the bustle of clearing ship for action. Already +it was plain that Heidrek meant fighting, if he could make no gain +of these ships elsewise, for we could see that his men had hung the +war boards--the shields--along the gunwales. He would see the same +here directly, and make up his mind either to fight or fly. As we +armed ourselves, Bertric and I had some thoughts that he might +choose the latter.</p> +<p>Now, I would not have it thought that I had forgotten Fergus, +who had spent himself so bravely for us. The two English chaplains +and Phelim were caring for him forward, and I had seen that he was +himself again, so far as coming to his senses is concerned. Now we +went and spoke to him, with all thanks for his help.</p> +<p>He smiled and shook his head.</p> +<p>"The flesh is very weak," he answered. "Now tell me if I may not +go back to the cells again. This crowd of men bewilders me after +the quiet. I am not fit now for the open world."</p> +<p>"In truth you may, father," I answered, somewhat surprised, for +I had not a thought but that both would do so. "We shall not take +you far. You will be landed when we go to take up the queen's +treasure."</p> +<p>"Then we will ask the superior to send me alone," said Phelim. +"You mind that we deemed that the end of our life here had come. +Now, all is safe once more, for this time at least."</p> +<p>"I do not think that we shall go to the court of the Irish king +now," said I, thinking that they were sent with us thither. "King +Hakon, who is a friend of the queen's, is bound for Norway."</p> +<p>There that talk ended, for Hakon came forward to watch the +enemy, and called us to go to the raised foredeck with him. But he +spoke to the hermits in passing, and though they could not +understand him, yet they might see that his words were kindly.</p> +<p>We were going to windward of Heidrek fast. His ships had tried +to weather on us, but had failed. Neither side had taken to the +oars, for he saw that we had the advantage, and we had no need to +do so, therefore. It was a fair sailing match.</p> +<p>But now Heidrek saw what sort of ships he had to deal with, and +he did not like the look of them, being near enough to note their +height of side and strength of build. It is likely that, like +myself, he saw at last what manner of shipbuilder that Alfred was +of whom we had heard such tales. I had ever been told, when shipmen +gathered in our hall, that the ships of the west Saxons were framed +with all the best points of the best ships yet built, with added +size and power, and now I knew that all I had heard was but truth. +Also I minded how Bertric had laughed when I said that most likely +Vikings had taken these vessels, and understood why.</p> +<p>Heidrek saw that he had no chance if there was to be a fight, +and acted accordingly. Had he been an honest Viking, cruising for +ransom from coast towns, and toll from cargo ships as he met them, +or ready to do some fair fighting for any chief who had a quarrel +on hand, and needed a little more help toward the ending of it, no +doubt he would have borne down on us and spoken with Hakon. Being +what he was, with the smoke of the burning village of the harmless +fishers rising black against the hills to prove the ways of his +men; or else, being in no wise willing to let us hear of the +treasure he had found at last, he did but take a fair look at the +great ships, put his helm over, and fled down the coast westward +whence he had come.</p> +<p>Asbiorn sat below the break of the foredeck, paying no heed to +what went on. He had taken off his mail, and was drying it +carefully with some cloths which Hakon's men had given him. I +called down to him and told him what had happened.</p> +<p>"Best thing my father could have done," he growled, without +looking up. "He does not take foolish risks, as a rule."</p> +<p>Hakon came down the short ladder which led to the maindeck and +heard, and laughed. Then he went aft, and Asbiorn looked after him. +Some order passed, and the men ran to the sheet and braces.</p> +<p>"Eh, but I am sorry for father," quoth Asbiorn. "Your friends +are after him."</p> +<p>The ships paid off to the wind and followed Heidrek. At that +time we were broad off the end of the island, and I saw it again as +we had first sighted it from the sea in the gale. Phelim and Fergus +stood looking at it and the swift boat which was nearing the beach, +and I joined them. The good men were full of fears for their +brethren, but the Danes were gathered quietly on the beach, +watching the boat. There were five of them, and Hakon had sent +eight men ashore.</p> +<p>The long reef showed up with a fringe of curling breakers over +it, and the boat could not cross it. Hakon's men skirted it, and +found some channel they could pass through, and by that time the +Danes had learned their mistake, and were plainly in some +wonderment as to what they had best do. They gathered together and +followed the course of the boat, for I have no doubt they hoped to +see one or two of Asbiorn's men with the strangers. Then the boat +reached the beach, and they went to meet it.</p> +<p>Whereon was a sudden scattering, and some ran one way and some +the other. One man stayed with the boat, and the rest chased the +Danes into the sand hills, where we lost sight of them for the most +part. Once or twice we spied men between them, and once I thought +there was a fight on the slope of one of the nearest hills.</p> +<p>But before we passed beyond further view we knew that the Danes +had been taken, for Hakon's men, some of whom wore scarlet cloaks +and were easily to be known, came back to the shore, and drove +their captives before them. Whereby we knew that the hermits were +safe, and the two here gave thanks, almost weeping in their joy. +The two English clergy came then, and led them forward to the dim +cabin under the foredeck. Until they were sure that the island was +to be in peace, neither Phelim nor Fergus would touch aught of +food, and they needed it somewhat sorely.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch14" id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: Dane And +Irishman.</h2> +<p>Once we had settled down to that chase there was quiet on the +decks, and the ship was on an even keel. The ladies came out of +their cabin under the after deck and sat them down on a bench which +ran across under the shelter of the bulkhead, and I saw Gerda with +them. Thoralf's wife had cared for her, and had done it well, so +that she seemed to be a very queen as she sat there with those two +making much of her. The elder lady had known her as a child, for +she had been in Thorwald's hall with Thoralf the Tall on that visit +of which he spoke. The younger lady, whose name I knew afterward to +be Ortrud, was of Gerda's age.</p> +<p>Presently it was plain that Gerda would have us speak to them, +and we went and were made known to them, and after that we sat and +told of our doings for half an hour. Thoralf's wife had naught but +thanks to us for caring for Gerda, so that I was glad when Hakon +joined us for a little while.</p> +<p>He went forward soon, taking us with him, and sought Asbiorn, +who sat on the deck still scouring his wet arms and mail with the +cloths the men had lent him. Hakon asked if he could tell anything +of a large Norse ship which should have gone west some days ago. It +was that which we had seen on the day of our wreck.</p> +<p>"I have heard of a ship which has gone to trade at Sligo," said +Asbiorn. "It was in our minds to look for her ourselves presently. +That is far to the westward, and if you are in any hurry, you may +as well let my folk go, and follow her."</p> +<p>"No hurry at all," answered Hakon. "It seems that these ships of +yours are too well known for me to overlook. My men say that I am +sure to have to settle with Heidrek at some time, and I may as well +do so here as on the Norway shore next summer. I shall be busy +then, and Heidrek will have heard thereof. I am not busy just +now."</p> +<p>"You will be when you overhaul the ships," said Asbiorn. "But +they are of less draught than yours, and you may miss them yet. +Round yon point is the Bann River, whence we came this +morning."</p> +<p>Hakon turned away with a laugh, and watched the chase for a +time. Then he went aft and sat him down by the steersman, with Earl +Osric and Thoralf the Tall. Heidrek's ships were swift when before +the wind, and these great vessels might not overhaul them until +they had reached some shallow waters in the river mouth which +Heidrek had already entered. But there waited Dalfin and the Irish +levies, who would be gathered by this time in force.</p> +<p>Mayhap Heidrek would not chance being pent between two foes.</p> +<p>So that chase went on, and I wearied of watching it at last. +Then Bertric and I went to Asbiorn, for we would ask concerning +some things which had happened. Men were serving round the midday +meal at the time, and we ate and talked. The first thing I asked +him was what he had done with our ship.</p> +<p>"Sold her to one Arnkel in Norway, so to speak," he answered, +with a grin. "He was the man who had to do with this treasure ship +you picked up."</p> +<p>"Then you had some pact with Arnkel?"</p> +<p>"More or less," he said; "but there was a deal of chance in the +matter. In the gale I was outsailed, for your ship is not speedy, +as you know. The other two took refuge among the islands on the +Norse shore, and there heard of the great mound laying of Thorwald +which was to be. The ship had passed in the dawn of that morning, +and had not far to go. Whereon my father sent a message to Arnkel, +whom he knew, to say that he was at hand, and landed and fell on +him. As it turned out, he had better have taken his ships, for +Thorwald's folk set the ship adrift to save her from pillage. It +seems that they meant her to burn, but blundered that part. There +was nothing to fight for then, so they ceased. I came to the +islands and there had news of my father, and followed him. On the +way I passed Thorwald's ship at a distance, and was afraid of her, +she seeming to be a fully-armed war vessel. So I let her pass."</p> +<p>"Then you brought the news to Arnkel that she was not +burning?"</p> +<p>"So it was. Whereon he would have us sail at once in chase of +her on his account. As we would not do that, and he would not let +us go on our own, there was a small fight. In the end Arnkel's men +manned your ship and we sailed in company, the bargain being that +the treasure was to fall to the finder. We thought we might have +little difficulty in overhauling the vessel, and should have had +none if it had not been for you. Had you picked up a crew of +fishers?"</p> +<p>"No; we managed somehow by ourselves."</p> +<p>"I always told my father that Bertric was the best seaman we had +in all our crowd," Asbiorn said frankly. "You did well that +time."</p> +<p>Then he told us how they had searched for us much in the way +which we had thought likely, and so at last had heard of a wreck +when they reached the river Bann.</p> +<p>"Asbiorn," I said, "did you know that there was a lady on board +this ship which was to be burnt?"</p> +<p>"No, on my word," he said, starting somewhat. "So that is where +the young queen was hidden, after all? There was wailing when her +men found that she was missing, and they said that she must have +gone distraught in her grief, and wandered to the mountains. How +was she left on board?"</p> +<p>"Arnkel put her there," I answered.</p> +<p>"So that explains his way somewhat. He seemed to want that ship +caught, and yet did not. When we did sail, he steered wide of the +course she took, and too far to the northward."</p> +<p>Then his face grew very black, and he growled: "Bad we are, but +not so bad as Arnkel, who would have men think him an honest man. +Now, if it were but to get in one fair blow at him for this, it +were worth joining Hakon. I take it that he will hear your +tale--and maybe mine."</p> +<p>"And the lady's also," Bertric answered. "Well--wait until you +know what befalls your ships."</p> +<p>"And my father," answered Asbiorn, getting up and looking ahead. +"To say the truth, I am not altogether sorry of an excuse to leave +that company, which is bad, though I say it. Yet he was driven out +of his own home by his foes, and thereafter his hand has been +against all men. It is the crew he has gathered which I would +leave, not him."</p> +<p>We had not gained on the two pirate ships. Now they were +rounding that headland whence they had come, and were altering +their course. Asbiorn said that they were making for the river +mouth, and half an hour thereafter we opened it out and saw that +Heidrek was far within it, heading landward. The beacon fires +blazed up afresh as the watchers knew that he had returned, and +presently each fire had a second alongside it. Men thought that +Heidrek had brought us to help him raid the land.</p> +<p>There were Norsemen on board, men from Dublin, who knew the +mouth of the river as well as need be, and better than Heidrek, who +had been into it but this once before. One of them piloted the +ships after him, for Hakon meant to end the business even as he had +said, here and now, if he could, and sent for Bertric that he might +tell him more of the enemy. He heard somewhat of our story at this +time, we sitting on the after deck with him, but he said little +about it then.</p> +<p>I suppose that we stood into the river over the falling tide for +five miles or more. Then Heidrek took to his oars, finding that he +was chased in earnest, and Hakon did so likewise at once. It was a +beautiful river, wide and clear, with great, green hills on either +side, and thick forests at their feet. But never a boat on its +waters, or man on its shores did we see. Only from each hilltop the +smoke of the war beacons rose and eddied.</p> +<p>The channel narrowed presently as we held on, going with all +caution. Then we opened out a wide valley, down which ran a fair +stream, and there we saw the Irish at last. High up they were, +crossing the valley in a column of black-garbed warriors which +seemed endless. There was no sparkle of mail among them, but here +and there a speck of light flashed from an axe blade or spear +point, to tell us that they were armed men. They were keeping pace +with Heidrek's ships by crossing from point to point, and how long +they may have watched him and us from the forests I cannot say.</p> +<p>Now the river took a sharp bend, and I heard the pilot say to +his mate that Heidrek had better have a care at this stage of tide, +while Asbiorn, forward, was watching intently. The tide was almost +at its lowest by this time, and Heidrek's hindmost ship was about +half a mile ahead of us. Hakon meant to pen them in some stretch of +the river which the pilot knew, and there deal with them. It was +said to be a deep reach with a bar at its head, beyond which no +ship might pass until high water.</p> +<p>Suddenly there came a shout from the men forward, and the pilot +cried to the oarsmen to cease rowing. Heidrek's second ship had +gone aground. We could see her crew trying to pole her off, and +Hakon asked if we could reach her.</p> +<p>"Not by five score yards," answered the pilot; "but see what +happens."</p> +<p>I suppose that he knew the Irish ways, for he had hardly spoken +when somewhat did happen. Out of the fringe of thicket and forest +along the bank of the river swarmed the Irish, with yells and howls +which reached us plainly, and flung themselves into the water to +wade out to the ship. The bank was black with them, and the light +from their axes overhead shimmered and sparkled in a wave of +brightness. The water was full shoulder deep round the ship, but +they did not heed that. Nor did they pay any attention to us, for +we could not reach them, and they knew it. They would deal with us +presently in one way or another. Meanwhile, this ship was at their +mercy.</p> +<p>Heidrek's other ship held on round the bend, and may have been +out of sight of her consort before she grounded, as the river bent +with its channel close under the banks. At all events, she did not +return to help.</p> +<p>"This affair is off our hands," said Hakon. "Best not meddle +therewith, even if we could. It is a great fight."</p> +<p>So it was, for the Danes fought well. The sides of the ship were +high above the wading men, and the spears flashed out between the +war boards, and the axe and sword were at work across the gunwales. +Yet the Irish never fell back from their swarming attack, and their +cries never ceased. One or two wounded men floated, paddling with +their hands, down past us, and hurled curses and defiance at us +also. Phelim and Fergus cried to them to forbear, for we were +friends, but they did not heed them, and passed, to reach the shore +below us as they might. We did not watch them.</p> +<p>For now the Irish had borne down the defence amidships, where +the run of the gunwales was lowest. The sheer weight of them as +they clambered, one over the other, on board, listed the ship over, +and made the boarding easier for those who followed. The wild +Danish war shout rose once or twice, and then it was drowned by the +Irish yell. After that there was a sudden silence, for the fighting +was over.</p> +<p>Then the victors leapt out of the ship and went ashore as +swiftly as they had come, and the forest hid them. The ship was +hard and fast aground now, and we pulled up abreast of her slowly, +having no mind to share her fate. Whether the Irish took any of her +crew with them as captives I do not know, but I saw her decks, and +it seemed hardly possible. So terrible a sight were they, that I +feared lest Gerda should in any way see it. But the doors of the +cabin had been shut, doubtless lest the fighting should fray the +ladies.</p> +<p>"Will you venture farther, King Hakon?" asked the pilot.</p> +<p>"We will take one ship farther," he said. "The other shall bide +here, and see that this ship is not burnt by these wild folk. +Mayhap we shall want her."</p> +<p>Thoralf laughed at that. "We have no men to man her withal," he +said.</p> +<p>"We have men to sail her to Norway, and there wait the men to +fight for us," Hakon answered gaily. "We shall meet no foes on the +high seas, and we have met a queen whose men will hail us as their +best friends."</p> +<p>Thoralf shrugged his shoulders and laughed. "None can say that +you fare forward sadly, Hakon."</p> +<p>"This is the worse of the two ships," Bertric said. "The other +is Heidrek's own. He is not here. Asbiorn yonder commanded +this."</p> +<p>"Asbiorn is in luck today," Earl Osric said, nodding toward +those terrible decks.</p> +<p>But Asbiorn stood on the foredeck with his back to that which he +had looked on, biting the ends of his long moustache, and pale with +rage. I did not wonder thereat.</p> +<p>Now Osric hailed the other ship and bade her anchor in the +stream while we went on. The pilot said that we could safely do so, +and that the next reach was the one of which he had spoken as a +trap. Then his comrade went into the bows with a long pole, +sounding, and so we crept past the stranded vessel, and into the +most lovely reach of river I had ever seen. It was well nigh a +lake, long and broad, between the soft hills and forest-clad +shores, and the water was bright and clear as glass beneath our +keel, so that I saw a great silver salmon flash like an arrow past +the ship as we held on. There was a village at the head of the +reach, and men swarmed in it like angry bees round a hive's mouth. +Only the long black ship, which still pulled slowly away from us, +and the fiercely-burning fires on every hilltop spoilt the quiet of +the place.</p> +<p>"Now it is a question whether the Irish or we take Heidrek," +said Hakon. "It is plain that his time has come, one way or the +other. On my word, I am almost in the mind to hail him and bid him +yield to us to save himself from these axes."</p> +<p>I believe that so Hakon would have done, but that the chance +never came. And that was the doing of Heidrek himself, or of his +crew. What madness of despair fell on those pirates I cannot say, +but Asbiorn has it that they went berserk as one man at the last, +as the wilder Vikings will, when the worst has to be faced.</p> +<p>The Irish swarmed at the upper end of this reach, as I have +said, and those who had dealt with the other ship were coming fast +along the shore to join them. There must have been five hundred of +them in all, if not more. The river beyond the broad reach narrowed +fast, and one could see by the broken water that there was no +passing upward any farther until the tide was at its height. But +before the village was a long sloping beach, on which lay two or +three shapeless black skin boats, as if it was a good landing place +with deep water up to the shore. Above the village, on the shoulder +of the near hill, was an earthwork, and some tents were pitched +within its ring. It was the gathering-place to which Dalfin had +gone this morning, and no doubt his father, Myrkiartan the King, +was there.</p> +<p>There came a hoarse roar across the water to us, which rose and +fell, and shaped itself into a song, so terrible that I saw Hakon's +men grow restless as they heard it. The pirates were singing their +war song for the last time.</p> +<p>Their ship swung round and headed for the village, and with all +her oars going, and the white foam flying from her bows, and +boiling round the oar blades, she charged the beach and hurled +herself half out of the water as she reached it.</p> +<p>Over her bows went her men with a shout. Before the Irish knew +that anything had happened, the last of the Danes were halfway up +the little beach, and were forming up into a close-locked wedge, +which moved swiftly toward the village even as it grew into +shape.</p> +<p>"What are they about?" asked men of one another as they watched, +breathless, from our decks.</p> +<p>"They will try to win to yonder camp," one said in answer, and +that was likely, though what hope could lie in that none could +say.</p> +<p>Now the wedge had reached the little green which was between the +village and the shore. Before it lay the road hillward, steep and +rough, and that was full of Irish.</p> +<p>Still the Irish held back. They looked to see our ship follow, +no doubt, and would have all their foes ashore at once, lest we +should make some flank attack in the heat of the fight. But the +Danes moved onward steadily.</p> +<p>Then into the opening of the lane rode a man on a tall chestnut +horse, and the Irish yelled and thronged to him as he leaped off +it. It was Dalfin himself, as I saw when he was on foot. I suppose +that he had managed to find this steed somewhere on the way, +meeting with mounted men hurrying to the levy like himself most +likely. If the fishers were yet with him I could not see. They were +lost in the crowd round him.</p> +<p>Now Dalfin's sword went up, and the men shook themselves into +some sort of order. A slogan rose, wild and shrill, and with the +prince at their head they flung themselves on the Danes, lapping +round them, so that they hid them from our sight. Only in the midst +of the leaping throng there was a steady, bright cluster of helms, +above which rose and fell the weapons unceasingly.</p> +<p>The Irish could not stay that wedge. It went on, cleaving its +way through the press as a ship cleaves its way to windward through +the waves, and after it had passed, there was a track of fallen men +to tell of how it had fared. There were mail-clad men among that +line of fallen, and those, of course, were not Irish. They, like +Dalfin, would wear neither helm nor byrnie.</p> +<p>Slowly the Danes fought their way, uselessly to all seeming, +away from the water and hillward. Without heeding the depth of the +lane from the village, though the darts rained on them from its +banks, they went on, and we lost sight of the fighting, though the +black throng of warriors who could not reach their foe still +swarmed between them and the village. Some of them came back and +yelled at us from the shore, and once they seemed as if they were +about to launch the two boats which lay on the strand for an attack +on us. We had dropped a small anchor at this time.</p> +<p>Father Phelim saw that and came to me.</p> +<p>"Let me go to the young prince," he said; "I may be of use here. +There will be trouble, unless someone tells the poor folk that +these ships are friendly in very deed."</p> +<p>So we went to Hakon, and I told him what Phelim thought.</p> +<p>"The good father is right enough," he answered. "But how is he +to get ashore unharmed? To send a boat would mean that it would be +fallen on before it was seen who was in it."</p> +<p>"Let me swim," said Phelim stoutly.</p> +<p>"Maybe your tonsure might save you, father," said Hakon; "but I +would not risk it. One cannot see much of a man in the water."</p> +<p>"Let me have one of the small boats--it can be launched from the +far side of the ship--and I will row him ashore," I said. "I can +speak the Gaelic."</p> +<p>Hakon considered. "Well," he said, "it may save endless trouble, +and I do not see why you should not go. Phelim must stand up, and +they will see him."</p> +<p>Thoralf would have us bide on board, letting Phelim stand on the +bows and hail the shore. But that would have made trouble at once, +for he would have been thought to be a captive. Then Earl Osric +said that we might as well wait until we must, but Hakon and I and +Phelim thought it easier to deal with the few men here than to wait +until the rest returned, most likely flushed with the victory their +numbers must needs give them. So in the end the small quarterboat +was got over the side away from the village, and we took our place. +Phelim was in the bows, and I set my helm at my feet, and had a +dark cloak over my mail.</p> +<p>I pulled away from the ship and came round her stern in a wide +sweep, in order not to seem at once as if we came from her. Then we +went swiftly to the beach, and Phelim stood in the bows and signed +to the men who stood along it. They saw what he was, and ran +together to meet him, ceasing their cries to hear him. But I was +not going to run more risk than I could help. So soon as we were +twenty yards from the beach, I stopped pulling, and bade Phelim say +his say.</p> +<p>He told them what was needful, and they growled at first, as if +they could not believe him. Then he pointed to Fergus, who could be +seen on board the ship, and they grew more satisfied. At last he +told them that they must fetch Dalfin the Prince as soon as +possible, for that we of the ship, or some of us, were those who +had brought him back. And at last he told how there was a queen on +board who had avenged the death of Dubhtach of the Spearshafts, and +given back the torque which was lost.</p> +<p>That was all they needed to hear, for the torque had been seen, +and word had passed round concerning it. The black looks faded, and +there was naught but friendliness thereafter. Phelim asked for some +leader, and a man stepped forward, and so took messages for Dalfin, +and went across the green and up the lane with its terrible token +of the fighting, that he might give them as soon as it was +possible. Then we rowed back slowly, for it was not worthwhile to +go ashore.</p> +<p>"Thanks," said Hakon, meeting us at the gangway. "That is well +done. I will own that we had nearly run ourselves into a trap, and +you have taken a load off my mind."</p> +<p>"No need to have stayed here," said Thoralf.</p> +<p>"Nay, but I want that ship, and now I think we may get her. I +did but stay to see if it might be done."</p> +<p>I went and found Asbiorn, for somewhat was troubling me. The +thought of the men who had been taken at the same time as myself, +and must needs be in one or other of these ships.</p> +<p>"We took seven in all," he said. "Well, I had five. Two got away +in Norway as soon as we fell out with Arnkel. One was too much hurt +to be of use, and we left him there. My father took the other two, +and they are yonder with him, I suppose. Those two who joined us of +their own free will were in my ship. They were good men."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch15" id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: The Torque And Its +Wearer.</h2> +<p>The roar of that unseen battle came across the still water to us +without cease for well nigh half an hour. The first surety we had +that it was over was in the dying away of the noise and the coming +back to the shore of men from the front who were unwounded. After +that we could see the black mass of Irish climbing the hill to the +camp quietly, as if to tell their king that they had conquered. +There was much shouting thence shortly after they had passed within +the earthworks.</p> +<p>Then out of the gate of the camp, which was toward the river, +came a train of men, the leaders of which were mounted, and after +them swarmed the levies again. Dalfin was bringing his father to +see the place of the fight, and to welcome us as friends. It was +not altogether a new thing that Norseman and Dane should be known +as foes to one another here on the Irish coast, which both wasted. +The folk called us the "white" and the Danes the "black" +Lochlannoch, and I cannot say which they feared the most, though +the Danes were the most hated. But the Irish kings were not slow to +take advantage of our rivalries when they could.</p> +<p>Asbiorn came to me as I stood and watched the king coming out of +the camp. His face was white and drawn, but he was calm enough.</p> +<p>"Who was the tall, young chief on the red horse?" he asked +me.</p> +<p>"Dalfin of Maghera, whom you let go with me," I answered.</p> +<p>"So I thought. Now, I think that he has avenged that doing on +the Caithness shore for you. It is not likely that my father has +not fallen; he was the leader of the wedge. There is no feud now +between you and me."</p> +<p>"There is not," I answered. "I do not know that I had ever +thought of one as possible."</p> +<p>"There would have been had Hakon slain Heidrek," he said.</p> +<p>The old law of the blood feud had its full meaning to him.</p> +<p>"If Heidrek had stayed his men to meet us, Hakon would have +given him terms rather than that this should have been the end," I +said.</p> +<p>"I know it, for I heard him say so. But there was a touch of the +berserk in my father since his troubles came. This is not the first +time he has tried to fall fighting against odds. He would not have +listened to Hakon."</p> +<p>He sighed heavily, and then shook himself, so that his mail +rattled. I took his sword from the bottom of a boat on deck in +which I had set it, and gave it back to him, and he girt it on.</p> +<p>"So that is the end," he said. "And now I am my own man. Well, +it was a better end than might have been had Hakon waited to see if +we came raiding to Norway, as we most certainly should. Now I can +follow Hakon with a light heart, and maybe come to be known as an +honest man once more."</p> +<p>He said no other word, but turned and went forward. Bertric +looked after him and smiled.</p> +<p>"Hakon has a good follower there," he said. "I will see that he +is not overlooked. Heidrek was the son of a king in Jutland, and +the good blood will show itself at last."</p> +<p>"You know Hakon well," I said, having seen that the greeting +between those two was not of an every day sort, or as between +prince and follower merely.</p> +<p>"We two were long together in Athelstane's court," he answered. +"I also am Athelstane's foster son. He has many, according to our +custom."</p> +<p>There was a rush made for the entrance to the village by the +Irish who yet loitered on the shore staring at us. Some of them had +carried away the wounded from off the green already, and now they +left nothing to be seen of the track of the Danes across it. The +king was coming, and Hakon sent word to the cabin that the ladies +should come and see him. We lay perhaps three hundred paces from +the shore, and there was no sight to fray them now.</p> +<p>So they and we went to the after deck and watched, and there was +not long to wait. But it was Dalfin who came alone, and mounted on +a fresh horse. It was plain that he had been fighting, because he +had his left arm in a sling, though he managed his horse none the +worse for that. He rode down to the beach in all haste, with a +dozen men after him, and waved his hand to us. Then he dismounted, +and the men put off the nearest boat, into which he stepped. In +five minutes he was on the deck, and greeting us.</p> +<p>"This is wonderful," he said. "All this morning I have been +crossing the hills to reach here in the nick of time. I heard no +news, and I saw no messengers. I did not even know that Heidrek had +sailed hence and returned. Now you are here first, and one comes +with a message from you on the spot. The luck of the torque lingers +with Queen Gerda even yet."</p> +<p>He bowed to her in his way, and she laughed, and looked for the +gold. He had not it on him now.</p> +<p>"Have you parted with it already?" she asked.</p> +<p>"With the torque, but not with the luck, as it is to be hoped," +he said. "You will see my father wearing it soon. It must needs be +on the neck of the head of the realm."</p> +<p>"What were you while you wore it?" asked Thoralf, who knew the +Irish ways.</p> +<p>"Deputy king for the time," answered Dalfin dryly. "And in a +hurry to hand it over to my father therefore."</p> +<p>Now, as Dalfin had elder brothers, and there were chiefs almost +as powerful as the king himself, that was to be expected. +Otherwise, our friend might have had an evil time between them. +Unless he had chosen to put himself at the head of the men whom he +had just led to victory, and called to them to set the torque +wearer on the throne. They would have done it, by reason of the +magic of the thing; but there was no thought of treason in the mind +of Dalfin, though many a king's son would have grasped at the +chance, holding, perhaps, that as the sign of royalty had come to +him, the throne must needs come with it, though his father held +it.</p> +<p>Then he told us how the fight had gone--how Heidrek fell at the +forefront of his steadfast wedge, and how but few men had been +taken unhurt. Hakon asked what he would do with those who were +taken.</p> +<p>"Give them to you," Dalfin answered carelessly, "if you will +take them out of this land."</p> +<p>"I was going to ask for the ship," Hakon said.</p> +<p>"She is yours already. You drove her ashore, and the honour +falls to us. We should only make a big fire of her and dance round +it. Where is the other?"</p> +<p>"Your men took her round the bend below. There will be no more +trouble with Heidrek. We have his son, Asbiorn, here with us."</p> +<p>"Give him to me," said Dalfin at once; "give him to me, King +Hakon. I owe him much for a good turn he did me and Malcolm here, +and I cannot see him a captive."</p> +<p>"Malcolm and Bertric have claimed him already," said Hakon, with +a smile. "He is yonder, and has taken service with me, and I think +I must keep him."</p> +<p>"That is all one could want for a man," answered Dalfin. "Now, I +have to ask if you will go ashore and meet my father. He would also +see my two comrades, and, if it may be so, Queen Gerda."</p> +<p>But Thoralf would not hear of the king going ashore, nor would +Earl Osric. Gerda, too, shrank from facing the wild crowd of +warriors and the sights of the field which she needs must see more +or less of. Nor did Dalfin press the matter, for he knew that any +little spark might be enough to rouse the wild Irish against the +Norsemen. It was but a chance that Hakon had played the part of an +ally. So in the end Bertric and I went ashore with Dalfin and the +two hermits, as an embassy, so to speak, to represent Hakon.</p> +<p>We had a good welcome at all events, I suppose because men had +heard the tale of our voyage and wreck, and maybe of how Hakon +saved the hermits at last. Phelim had spoken thereof when he and I +went ashore just now, and word passes swiftly without losing in the +telling. They took us up through the village to the camp, and there +a tent was pitched, large and open in front, as the court of the +king.</p> +<p>The enclosure swarmed with men, wilder than any I had ever seen, +and picketed rows of most beautiful horses were along one side.</p> +<p>It was a strange court. The nobles were dressed in black or dull +saffron-coloured tunics, with great, shaggy cloaks of the natural +hue of the wool they were made of, and but for the rich gold +ornaments they wore on their arms and necks, there was little to +choose between their attire and that of their followers. Not one +wore mail, but their swords were good, and their spears heavy and +well cared for. As for helms, they had no need of them. Their hair +was amazingly thick and long, and was massed into great shocks on +their heads, and might turn a sword stroke. Even Dalfin had twisted +his up into somewhat like what it might have been before he left +Ireland, lest he should be out of the fashion, and it spoilt his +looks, though it would be many a long day before he had it properly +matted together again. It was strange to see men tossing these +shocks aside as they turned.</p> +<p>One other thing I noted at once, and that was how every man, +high or low, carried a long-handled axe, bright and keen. It was +the only weapon of some, and if they knew how to handle it, maybe +they needed no other.</p> +<p>Among all that crowd there were only two men who seemed to shine +in any magnificence. One was the old king, who sat waiting us in a +great chair, clad in royal robes of scarlet and white and green +which no Irish looms could have compassed, with a little golden +crown on his white hair, and the torque round his neck. The other +was a bishop in mitre and all state robes, wonderfully worked, and +with a crosier in his hand. Not having seen the like before I +wondered most at him, but his looks were kind and pleasant. Phelim +told me who and what he was afterward.</p> +<p>Myrkiartan came from his throne to greet us as we passed through +a lane of wild courtiers, who had looks which were not all of the +most friendly for us. But we paid no heed to them, though I thought +that Hakon was well advised when he sent us instead of coming +himself. That first greeting was for us alone as the comrades of +Dalfin, and it was a good welcome. Then the king went back to his +throne with all ceremony, to receive us as the embassy from Hakon. +There was no little state kept up in this court, and matters were +to be kept in their right order.</p> +<p>Now, I need say little of all this ceremony and the words which +passed of thanks to Hakon for driving the enemy to his end. +Myrkiartan made no suggestion that Hakon should stay here, and +seemed more willing to speed him on his way elsewhere. Presently, +he said, there should be sent to the strand oxen and casks of mead +as provender for the voyage, and Hakon was most welcome to take the +ship if he would.</p> +<p>Thereon Dalfin asked for the captives, and they were brought +in--a dozen Danes, who stared at their captors haughtily in spite +of their bonds. Then they spied Bertric in the splendid arms which +Gerda gave him, for we had come fully armed, and they looked toward +him as if they would ask his help, but were too proud to do so. And +then of a sudden one of them spoke my name, and I knew him, though +his face was half-hidden in the mud of the field on which some +common chance had sent him down. It was that man of ours who had +told me that there was always the chance of escape, and had tried +to gnaw my bonds when we were in the ship's forepeak--Sidroc, the +courtman. I did not pretend to know him then and there, thinking it +might seem proof that Hakon was in league with Heidrek in some way. +Presently, when his low cry was forgotten, I looked at him, and he +saw that I knew him, and was content.</p> +<p>"Look at the men, Bertric," said Dalfin. "See if there are any +you will care to take. You know them."</p> +<p>"We cannot leave any of them here," Bertric said to me. "Hakon +can set them ashore anywhere if he does not like them. Asbiorn +might manage them though, and with Hakon's men they will learn +manners."</p> +<p>He spoke our own tongue of course, and the king asked what he +said. Dalfin said that Hakon would take them away altogether if the +clemency of the king would allow it. Whereon the king waved his +hand, and said that they should be sent down with the oxen.</p> +<p>Now, I did not think that this pleased the men of the court. +There was a sort of uneasy murmur for a time, and then there was a +silence, which grew somewhat awkward at last. I thought it was time +for us to go, for there was nothing else to say, but the bishop +came forward. He had been speaking with Phelim for some time, and +now told Myrkiartan how that Hakon was a good Christian man and had +saved the hermit brotherhood even now. That story made the black +looks pass at once, and after that it was easy to take our leave +and make our way out of the tent; and glad enough I was to be in +the open once more. The whispering of the nobles had not been +pleasant at times.</p> +<p>Dalfin came out with us, and he was grave. There had been words +and looks now and then among the group of men with his two brothers +which he did not like.</p> +<p>"You had better tell Hakon from me that he had best sail hence +as soon as possible. Maybe as soon as tide will serve. I will see +that you get the men now and at once. Never wait for the provender +unless it comes soon."</p> +<p>"Come down to the ship with us," I said. "Tell Hakon this +yourself if you will."</p> +<p>He shrugged his shoulders at that and glanced round him.</p> +<p>"If it were not for you two I doubt if Hakon would not have been +fallen on by this time," he said. "There are boats enough, hidden +in the village from Heidrek, which can be brought out at any +moment."</p> +<p>He was speaking in the Dansk, but suddenly took to the Erse with +some words or other of common farewell, as a tall Irish chief +passed with a scowl at us.</p> +<p>"Jealousies through and through this court," he said quickly, +when the man was out of hearing. "Already some pretend to be wroth +with me for having any dealing with Lochlannoch at all. I am the +youngest son, and my father favours me, more's the pity."</p> +<p>"Better quit it all, and come and help Hakon to the throne," I +said.</p> +<p>"If it were not for my father," he answered.</p> +<p>So then and there he bade us farewell, with messages to Gerda +and Hakon, and called some of his own men to see us to the ship. We +left him standing in the gate, looking after us somewhat sadly, as +we thought.</p> +<p>"Now," said Bertric, "it seems to me that one may guess why +Dalfin went to sea to find adventure. This court is not a happy +home, take it all round."</p> +<p>Halfway down to the ship we heard some one running after us, and +looked round. It was Father Phelim.</p> +<p>"Take me with you, my sons," he said, breathless. "I feared that +you would go without me."</p> +<p>"We had not thought you would care to sail with us again," I +said.</p> +<p>He made no answer beyond a smile, and we went on. Men stood and +stared at us at every turning, axe in hand. In the lane they +wrangled over the spoils they gathered there from the fallen Danes, +and fought fiercely with the long helves of their weapons without +hurting one another at all by reason of their shock heads. One who +was felled thus would rise and laugh, and the quarrel was at an +end. They were a light-hearted folk to all seeming.</p> +<p>Once a handsome, frowning chief came past us at a gallop on his +swift horse. He was glittering with gold, but the steed had neither +saddle nor bridle. Its only harness was a halter, but the man rode +as if he were part of the horse, so that it was a pleasure to watch +him. It was more than either Bertric or I could have managed.</p> +<p>The Danish ship was afloat when we reached the waterside, for +the tide had risen swiftly in these upper waters, and the Irish had +helped to get her off, after plundering her. There were a dozen or +more of Hakon's men on board at this time, making her decks +shipshape again. But below the bend rose a black cloud of smoke, +for the other ship was on fire, and Hakon had sent a boat to see +that all was well with the ship he had left there.</p> +<p>There was no surprise at the message from Dalfin. Thoralf only +laughed, and Hakon said he would wait for half an hour in case the +supplies came. As for the men, he would take them willingly. There +was no need to arm them, and they would take their spell at the +oars.</p> +<p>Presently Irish came to the beach holding up spoils--helms and +mail shirts, and the Danish swords they did not know how to use. +Hakon bought them for silver pennies easily, and the folk thought +themselves well paid. So an hour passed, and then the hapless Danes +were driven down in a string to the water's edge, and we sent a +boat for them. One had a hasty message from Dalfin to say that in +no wise were we to wait for aught else. The Dane told me that there +was strife up at the camp, and the young prince had had difficulty +in getting them away.</p> +<p>Hakon spoke to the men, when they came on board, kindly, and +bade them take service with him if they would, as had Asbiorn, and, +as may be supposed, they were only too willing. And then I asked +for our courtman, telling Hakon how it came about that he was with +these pirates, and he turned him over to me at once as my special +follower. Nor need it be said how Sidroc greeted me after that +escape. He said that Heidrek's men had thrust a spear into his hand +and hustled him over the bows to take his chance with the rest, +unarmed save with that.</p> +<p>Thereafter, Hakon found mail and helm and sword for him, which +had come from the spoils, and he was happy. Nor was I any the less +comfortable on board for having him to tend myself and Bertric. But +that is of course.</p> +<p>From him we learned two things--one which Asbiorn had not yet +told us, and the other which he also would learn. Heidrek had fled +from us thinking that the ships could be only those of Sigtryg, the +Dublin king, with whom he had some deadly feud. I minded that when +Dalfin had offered ransom for both of us how Asbiorn had said that +the Irish shore was not open to him. Then, when he was thus pent up +by us, Heidrek had tried to cut his way to the camp and take +Myrkiartan prisoner, that he might hold him as hostage for safe +departure. It was a mad attempt, but at least had some meaning in +it which we could not understand at the time. Moreover, had it not +been for the men who came up with Dalfin it had been done.</p> +<p>Now Hakon made no delay. Thoralf and as strong a crew as could +be spared took charge of the Danish ship, and together the two +vessels cautiously made their way down the long reach and past the +place where Heidrek's other ship was still burning. By that time +the dusk was falling, but we were sure that all along the shores +the Irish watched us as they had watched us as we came.</p> +<p>The beacon fires had died down now, for their work was done, and +the fair reaches of water were still and peaceful in the evening +glow, looking even more beautiful than in the morning, for the tide +was full to the banks. Gerda came with the other ladies and sat on +deck, and spoke with Hakon of the treasure, which he promised to +seek with daylight.</p> +<p>"I would have you take it, King Hakon," she said. "I do not +altogether know its worth, but it may go toward the freeing of +Norway from Eric and the men who follow him."</p> +<p>"Nay," he answered, "I cannot take it from you."</p> +<p>"Once," she said, and she looked at me as I sat on the deck hard +by with Bertric, "once--it seems long ago, though it is but so few +days--I would have sent it into the deep with him who gathered it. +These friends of mine over-persuaded me, saying that I should need +it. Now I am in your care, and I have not so much as to hire a ship +to take me home. It was Thorwald's. What if you had come back and +asked him to help you? Would it not have been laid at your feet for +the sake of the old land and the old friendship?"</p> +<p>He smiled, but did not answer. So she set the gift before him +once more, with eager words. I knew, as I listened, that she would +be the happier if the wealth once dedicated, so to speak, to so +high an end as that gift to the old hero were taken from her +charge, and used to the freeing of the land she loved; and at last +Hakon saw that there was some deeper feeling about it than +gratitude to himself only.</p> +<p>"Well," he said, "it seems that I must not refuse. Only, I will +put it in this way--I am to know that you hold it for me in case I +need it. Be sure that if it is needed I will make haste to +ask."</p> +<p>"Aye, and you will need it," said Earl Osric bluntly.</p> +<p>Then Gerda said: "Take it now, and use it if and when you need +it. Let it be so, I pray you, King Hakon."</p> +<p>The young king bowed and thanked her, and there that matter +ended for the time. Presently, after the ships had come to anchor +with the last light in the river mouth, and the men had spread the +awnings for us aft, he spoke to us about it, and I told him what I +thought. Also I told him how that Bertric and I had enough wealth +on us at this moment for the fitting out of a ship as we had +planned. Whereon he laughed.</p> +<p>"Keep that," he said, "and I shall be content. Gerda will know +nothing of the worth of what you have, and you will use it for her +if needed. I have a plan in my mind for her, which may be told +hereafter."</p> +<p>Then one of the men came to the opening of the awning.</p> +<p>"A boat, King Hakon, with two men in her, pulling to us from the +western bank."</p> +<p>"Hail her to keep off," said Hakon.</p> +<p>And Osric added that they should heave a big stone into her if +she did not. "Spies, most like," he said.</p> +<p>They hailed the boat, and had an answer at once.</p> +<p>"Tell Hakon that hither comes a courtman of Queen Gerda's."</p> +<p>Hakon said that it must be some man who had escaped; but Bertric +and I knew at once.</p> +<p>"It is Dalfin the Prince," we said. "He has had to fly from +those brothers of his."</p> +<p>So it was, and he had come to see more adventure with King +Hakon.</p> +<p>"I might find enough if I stayed," he said; "but of an evil +sort."</p> +<p>"Why, what is amiss then?" I said.</p> +<p>"Only that my brothers do not like favourites, and I happen to +be one for the moment. There would have been fighting if I had +stayed, and that would have ended in my good father being pushed +off his throne by my elder brother lest I should be named as +successor to the crown. Or else in sudden end to myself."</p> +<p>Then he laughed, as if somewhat pleasant came to mind.</p> +<p>"There are strange stories afloat concerning me and the torque +already," he went on. "It is said that the fairy queen has had me +in her court for all this time I have been away, and that she gave +me back the thing. So I have even fled suddenly and secretly, and +they will hold that she has lured me back again."</p> +<p>"It is not altogether for your own safety that you have fled," +said Hakon gravely.</p> +<p>"Faith, and so it is not," he answered. "I had but to lift my +finger, and the wearing of the torque would have set me on the +throne. And a mighty uneasy seat that would have been, too! I think +my father is used to it, and might have missed the seat. So I +left."</p> +<p>"For your father's sake," said Hakon, smiling at him. "Well, +come and help me to not quite so uneasy a realm, and all may be for +the best. There is little freedom for him who holds an Irish +throne, as it seems to me."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch16" id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: In Old Norway.</h2> +<p>The ships were under way with the tide in the gray of the early +morning, and crept along the shore to the island slowly. There were +men watching our going from the cliffs, but there had been no alarm +from the Irish in the night. I dare say they claim to have driven +Hakon of Norway from their shores even to this day, but I do not +know that it matters if they do. No one is the worse for the boast, +or the better either, for that matter.</p> +<p>Hakon took the ships into the little strait for easier landing +than from the open shore. His men were waiting at the water's edge +for us, but there were no hermits to be seen at first, for it was +one of their hours of service in the chapel. We had heard the faint +ringing of its little bell as we drew up to the opening of the +strait. Bright and clear it was in the early morning sunlight, and +it was peaceful as ever. Even Hakon's men had set aside their mail +here, looking as quiet as the place itself.</p> +<p>Gerda would go ashore with us, and so in no long time we, who +had left here so hastily, stood once more on the shore, and +wondered to find ourselves back again, and safe; for the memory of +that flight came back to us afresh with all we saw. We had +forgotten it in the wild doings of the long day which came +thereafter.</p> +<p>Now, there is no need for me to tell of the greetings which were +for us, and for the young king. They were those of men who owed +much on either side, and yet must part again straightway. It seemed +that Hakon's men who had been landed were either Christians, or +else men who had taken the "prime signing" on them, which was the +way in which they proved that they were ready to learn the new +faith. Phelim would call them "catechumens," therefore, and that +word may be known as meaning the same thing. Presently I was to +hear more of that from him. The good hermits were ready to praise +them and their ways to the king, while, as for Asbiorn's men, they +had given no trouble at all, for they were tied up in the cell we +had used. One or two of Hakon's men, who were from Dublin, could +speak the Erse, and that had been good.</p> +<p>So there was gratitude and content when the hermits came and +spoke with Hakon through Dalfin, while I set the men to work +getting the treasure down to the boats. The brothers had buried it +as they promised, risking somewhat as they worked, for Asbiorn's +Danes might have wandered from the beach at any time. When that was +done they fled to the hill, until one of Hakon's men had gone +altogether unarmed and spoken with them, telling them that we and +they were safe.</p> +<p>Now, we had left Fergus behind us with the bishop, and he would +find his way back here shortly. Presently Phelim sought the old +superior and spoke long with him, and at last came and asked Gerda +to do the same. She went willingly enough, as she reverenced the +old teacher, taking me with her.</p> +<p>"My daughter," he said, "have you a mind to learn more of those +things of which we have spoken?"</p> +<p>"I can wish nothing better," she answered.</p> +<p>"Then," he said, "I have bidden Phelim go across the seas with +you to teach you and yours. Will it please you that he shall do +so?"</p> +<p>She flushed with delight, for that was what she had most wished, +as she had told me yonder on the shore. And I suppose that because +she had so told me, she looked to me to answer.</p> +<p>"Aye, what says Malcolm, my countryman?" asked the old man.</p> +<p>"If Father Phelim will undertake the task, which will be hard," +I answered.</p> +<p>"He will bear hardship for that work," the superior said, +setting his hand on the shoulder of the strong man, who had knelt +before him. "We shall miss him, but we shall know that mayhap he +will bring you twain to meet with us hereafter."</p> +<p>Then I said, being moved by words and tone, "So may it be, +father," and he smiled at me in much content.</p> +<p>After that Phelim said naught of his own feelings in the matter, +but went to the brothers one by one and took leave of them. +Afterwards I heard that yesterday the bishop had loosed him from +some vows which bound him to the island-hermit life, if it came to +pass that we would take him with us. And that was what he had +thought would befall him when he and Fergus rowed with us, with +Asbiorn in chase.</p> +<p>So we took leave of the old man then, for he was feeble, and +time was very short. He bade us remember that day by day in the +little chapel our names, and the name of Hakon also, would not be +forgotten; and blessed us, and went to his cell. Then one of the +brothers came and asked Gerda to see what she had left in her cell, +for none had touched it yet, and she went with him. Soon she came +out with that little silver cup, which we had found in the +penthouse when we first opened it, and asked me if she might give +it to the hermits.</p> +<p>"They will have no use for it," I said, smiling at the +thought.</p> +<p>"I think they will," she said. "Ask, for I cannot."</p> +<p>So I asked the brother who was with us, and he looked at the cup +gravely. It was wrought with a strangely twisted and plaited +pattern.</p> +<p>"Why, yes," he said. "I myself can set a stem to it, and +thereafter it will be a treasure to us, for our chalice is but of +white metal. It will mind us of you every day, in ways which are +more wondrous than you can yet know. We may take it, therefore, but +you must not offer us aught else. We are vowed to poverty."</p> +<p>Now, I did not know of what he spoke, but Gerda did in some way, +which is beyond me. Wherefore she was more than content. It is my +thought that all her days it will be a good and pleasant thing to +mind the use that cup came to at the last, and where it is.</p> +<p>The treasure was all on board Hakon's ship, and we must go with +the tide. The Danes were unbound and sent to help Thoralf on the +ship which had been theirs, with the offer of freedom if they +worked well; and I will add that they gave no trouble, and took +service with Hakon as free men afterward, having learnt the good of +honesty. The hermits saw us to the shore, and so we left them, and +the ships hoisted sail to a fair breeze, and were away for Norway +and what lay before Hakon when he came thither. And if the +blessings and prayers of the hermits availed aught, he would do +well.</p> +<p>Now, we had to gather men for this warfare that might be to +come. There were Norsemen in the Scottish islands everywhere who +would join him, for thither had fled many who were not friendly +with Eric, and the Orkney and Shetland Islands held more still. So +we sailed up the narrow seas among the isles, finding here one man, +and here a dozen, until the ships were fully manned, and that with +such a force as any leader might go far with, for the men served, +not for pay alone, but also for hope in Hakon, and to regain their +old homes in the old land. Moreover, two chiefs joined him with +their ships and crews in Hebrides, and there we heard news of Eric, +and how that men hated him, and would rise for Hakon everywhere +when once they knew that he was in the land.</p> +<p>So that was a long voyage and pleasant to me, nor did I seem to +care how long it lasted. Maybe the reason for that is not far to +seek, for I could not tell what more I might see of Gerda when it +ended. For I knew only too well that I had naught to offer her, +being but a landless man, with nothing but my sword for heritage. +And as the days passed, it seemed to me that in some way Gerda kept +herself afar from me, being more ready to speak with Hakon and +Bertric than myself, though again at times she was as ever with +myself in all ways.</p> +<p>Now I did not altogether wonder at this, and made the best +thereof, being minded to pass from her ken with Hakon when the time +came. I supposed that we should all go together with the young king +to that place which he should choose for his first landing, and +thereafter she would bide in his court until Eric had fled the land +and the power of Arnkel had ended with his fall. Then she would go +to her own place and be once more as a queen, while I would fare +with Hakon, and see what honour I might win.</p> +<p>Still, it was pleasant to sit on the deck in the soft, summer +weather, and talk with Thoralf's wife and daughter, Ortrud, and +watch Gerda as she forgot the hard things she had passed through, +and grew cheerful and happy once more. These two ladies were most +kind to her, and grew to be great friends in those long days at +sea.</p> +<p>One day, after we had left the Shetland Islands, and it wore +toward the end of the voyage, and we began to talk of where we +might best land and call on men to rise for Hakon, the elder lady, +Thoralf's wife, had been talking to me, and I think my mind had +wandered a little as I watched Gerda, who was on the after deck +with Bertric and Dalfin. The men were all clustered forward, and no +one was near for the moment.</p> +<p>"You two well bore the care of Gerda," she said in a low voice. +"See, she might never have passed through aught of peril or +hardship. Yet she will never forget those days of trial."</p> +<p>"She was very brave through them," I said. "The care was naught +but pleasure."</p> +<p>"Yet most heavy to you," she said. "I know you will make the +least of it all, but she knows well what she owes to you. Now, I +would have you think of what I say. It pleases you to call yourself +her courtman--well, that may be no bad way of putting your +readiness to serve her. But I would not have you forget that you +are Malcolm the Jarl."</p> +<p>I laughed, for the title never had meant much, even when my +father held it. Now it was altogether barren to me.</p> +<p>"So I am," I said; "but of no more use to Hakon for all that. If +I had a jarl's following now--"</p> +<p>"You are not needed by Hakon so much as by another, Malcolm," +she said. "To him you are one among many, and that is all."</p> +<p>"He has my first fealty," I answered. "He was the first who has +ever claimed it, and he has it, for good or ill."</p> +<p>"There was one who claimed your fealty before ever he saw you," +she said slowly, and smiling at me meaningly. "Will you forget +that?"</p> +<p>I could not pretend not to understand what she meant, and I +answered her with the thought which troubled me.</p> +<p>"Lady, I cannot forget it. But now it does not seem possible +that she should care to remember. There is no reason why she +should."</p> +<p>"Every reason, Malcolm," she said, as if angry with me. "Do you +think that all the care you had for her before Hakon came is to go +for naught?"</p> +<p>"Bertric and Dalfin are to be remembered in that matter +also."</p> +<p>"Of course. But Asa Thor, who was only Malcolm the Jarl after +all, being a fellow countryman, has had the first place."</p> +<p>"You seem to have heard all the story," I said, smiling.</p> +<p>"From the beginning," she answered, "else had I not spoken to +you thus. Now, I will not sit by and see Gerda, whom I love, made +wretched because you are somewhat too thoughtful for her, if I may +put it so. And I will tell you one thing which she fears more than +aught."</p> +<p>There she stayed her words and looked at me somewhat doubtfully. +I suppose that what she saw in my face told her that she might go +on, for she did so.</p> +<p>"Presently Hakon must needs find a protector for her, if her own +lands are to be won back for her. She fears who that may be."</p> +<p>Then she rose up and left me with some new matter for thought, +not altogether unpleasant. And thereafter, for the few days that +were left of the voyage, I did my best to be the same in all +companionship to our charge as I had been in the days on the +island.</p> +<p>Hakon made up his mind to sail north to Thrandheim <a name= +"Glyph2" href="#Note2" id="Glyph2">{2}</a>, where men loved his +father, and where the strength of Norway lay. With the +Thrandheimers behind him there would be every hope of winning in +the end, if there must needs be some fighting here and there before +the land was quiet. So he steered for the islands which lie outside +the great fjord whereon the town lies, and there found a berth for +the ships, while he sent men to find out how the minds of the folk +were turned toward Eric. Thoralf went, and two others who were +known in the district.</p> +<p>When they had gone, he sent for me to speak with him privately, +in the little house on the island where he was lodged with some +friend of his father's. He sat alone when I came in, and he smiled +when he saw me. I would have it remembered that Hakon was far older +than his years, and that we forgot what his age was, for, indeed, +he was wiser than most men even then.</p> +<p>"Malcolm," he said, "I want you to do somewhat for me. You will +have to leave me, and maybe it is not an easy matter which I have +in hand for you. Yet it is likely that you are the only man whom I +can set to do it."</p> +<p>"If that is so, King Hakon, needs must I undertake it," I +answered, lightly enough.</p> +<p>"It is a matter which was forced on you once; but now you shall +have your choice whether you will undertake it with your free will +or not."</p> +<p>He spoke gravely, but his eyes had the light of a jest in them, +and I had to smile.</p> +<p>"This sounds a terrible matter, King Hakon," said I. "Let me +know the worst of it."</p> +<p>"Someone has to take Gerda back to her own place and turn out +Arnkel for me. Thereafter, he will have to hold the land for me +quietly, and make ready for a rising for me if need is. I think +there will be little trouble, but I do not know what men of his own +this Arnkel may have. Will you do it?"</p> +<p>"Seeing that the care of a lady is in the matter, I will not, +for shame's sake, say that I will do it with a light heart," I +answered. "But you could have asked me nothing more after my own +mind. But what of the lady?"</p> +<p>"If you do not know that by this time," he said gaily, "I am +mistaken. Maybe you had better ask her."</p> +<p>"Am I to take her with me?"</p> +<p>"Yes," he said, gravely enough. "There may be fighting here, and +she is best out of the way. Her folk will hail her, and she will be +safe with them, Arnkel notwithstanding. Thoralf will send his wife +and daughter with her that they, too, may be safe."</p> +<p>Then he laughed at me again, and said that if all his followers +were so ready to leave him, he would be a lonely man shortly, and +so on. Yet I knew that for him to have one loyal haven in the south +lands would be no little gain, so that I was serving him as well as +Gerda.</p> +<p>"That is well," he said at last. "And I wonder how long I may be +able to jest thus. Now, I will give you the ship we took from +Heidrek, and Bertric will be shipmaster, for this is his affair +also. You shall have crew enough, at least, to make sure that +Gerda's men will join you without fear. And you shall sail +tomorrow, before ever Arnkel hears that I am in the land. Take him, +if you can, and deal with him as you will. Maybe a rope at the end +of the yardarm is what he deserves. But, anywise, do not let him +get to Eric if you can help it."</p> +<p>Then I had to fetch Bertric, and thereafter we arranged all that +was needful as to ship and crew. We were to have thirty men, and +that would be as many as we should want, seeing that Gerda's folk +would join us so soon as they knew that she had returned. Also we +must find a pilot, for Gerda's place lay some four days' sail down +the coast, at the head of the fjord which men call Hvinfjord, or +Flekkefjord, which lies among the mountains south of Stavanger, in +a land of lakes and forests and bright streams, of which she had +told me much.</p> +<p>Presently Hakon spoke to me of another matter wherein I might +help him. It was his hope that he might win Norway to the Christian +faith, and, indeed, I think that he cared little for the crown if +it might not give him power to that end. He knew that in the long +days of the homeward cruise both Gerda and I had been talking much +with Father Phelim and the two English clergy, so that we could not +be aught but friendly toward the faith, if not more.</p> +<p>"Stubborn are our Norse folk," he said, "and the work will be +hard. Maybe I shall do little, but someone else may take up the +task which I mean to begin. It must needs be begun at some time. In +that quiet place of Gerda's it is likely that men may listen +peacefully, and so will be a centre whence one may hope much."</p> +<p>Then I said, "So may it be, King Hakon; for this will be what +Gerda wishes most of all things."</p> +<p>"What of yourself then?" he asked.</p> +<p>Bertric answered for me, and I was glad.</p> +<p>"Malcolm thinks likewise, for so he has told me. But he will do +nothing in haste. This is a matter which is weighty, and in no wise +to be lightly gone into. But have no fear for him, Hakon."</p> +<p>Thereat Hakon smiled as if well pleased, and said no more. +Bertric did but speak the truth concerning me. But most of all, it +seemed to me that the new things I had learned were so wondrous +that I thought myself unfitted for them. I think that, if I tell +the truth, I must needs say that I was afraid thereof, in ways +which I cannot set into words.</p> +<p>Bertric and I went out to look for men when all was said that +needed saying, and the first person we found was Dalfin. The prince +was learning to be a very Norseman, and was in favour with all.</p> +<p>"Ho, Dalfin," I said, "are you minded to sail for another cruise +with the queen and us two?"</p> +<p>"Why," he asked, "what of Hakon and his warfare?"</p> +<p>We told him what we were to be about, and his face fell. I think +he deemed at first that he was in some way bound in honour to go +with us and see Gerda righted. But it was plain that he would +rather follow Hakon and meet with the adventure which must needs be +before him ere he came to the throne of his fathers.</p> +<p>So we played with him for a while, until he said that he would +sail with us if we needed him so sorely, and then let him go. There +was no honour to be won with us, and here he might end by standing +high in the court, and we had no need of him. Then we went and +chose men who were ready for a chance of speedy adventure, rather +than the waiting which matters of policy required here for the +moment. Presently Bertric would bring the ship back to Hakon with +them, if all went well. So we had no trouble in raising a very +willing crew. Moreover, the men who knew her were glad to serve +Gerda.</p> +<p>So word went about quickly of what we wanted, and we might have +had twice the number we asked for. Presently Asbiorn heard it, and +came up from the ships and sought us.</p> +<p>"So you are going to try conclusions with my friend Arnkel?" he +said. "Let me come with you. You need a pilot."</p> +<p>Now, we liked Asbiorn well enough, for all the way in which we +had met him, and the company whence he came to us. He was quiet and +fearless, keeping himself to himself, but pleasant in his ways, +troubling more over the thought of the ill repute of his father +than need have been, perhaps, for none blamed him for that. We had +already thought of him as likely to be useful to us; but he, again, +might do well with the king, for he had place and name to win, as +had Dalfin. We were glad that he would help us therefore, and +hailed his coming accordingly, to his content.</p> +<p>This island where we lay was hilly, and forest clad. The ships +were at anchor in the little sound between it and a smaller island, +hidden and safe, and the ladies were lodged in a house among the +woods on the south side of the hill, near the lodging of Hakon. The +woods were pleasant at this time, with the first touch of autumn on +the leaves of the birches, and the ripe berries of the Norseland +were everywhere.</p> +<p>So it happened that presently, as I went to Hakon's lodging with +some question which I had for him, I must take the nearest way from +the ships by the woodland paths, having to cross the island from +east to south, and leaving Bertric and Asbiorn on board. I had it +in my mind to find Thoralf's good wife presently, and talk to her, +for it seemed to me that this cruise might have much in store for +me. Hakon had told her of our sailing with the morning's tide.</p> +<p>But I heard someone singing in the wood, and knew the voice +well. It was Gerda who was wandering, and gathering the red +raspberries, and I had half a mind to turn aside and keep beyond +her sight. That thought came too late, however, for the path +turned, and I came on her suddenly, and she looked up from the ripe +berries she had found alongside the path and saw me.</p> +<p>A flush went across her fair face, and then she greeted me +brightly. I did not know what she had been told of tomorrow as yet, +and could not tell from her face whether she knew or not. So I +thought it best to ask.</p> +<p>"Have you heard aught from the king as to your going back to the +old home yet, Gerda?"</p> +<p>"Yes," she said, standing still and looking somewhat pitifully +at me. "And he says that it shall be at once. But I fear how he may +send me back."</p> +<p>"He will give you ship and men, and so see that there is no +chance of any great trouble with Arnkel."</p> +<p>"Aye--but--but, Malcolm, he says that he needs must find someone +who will help me hold the land. Who will that be, for he can spare +so few?"</p> +<p>"I think that he will let you make your own choice," I +answered.</p> +<p>"If I might--" she said, and there stopped, seeming +troubled.</p> +<p>Then I said, "And if you might, who would be the choice?"</p> +<p>She looked at me and paled, and then looked away at the berries +again. She stooped to pick one, and her face was away from me.</p> +<p>"I think it is cruel to ask that," she said in a low voice. "I +have no one here whom I know--save you, and Bertric."</p> +<p>I moved a pace nearer to her, but still she did not look up. The +crimson berries she bent over were no excuse for the colour of her +face at that moment, and I feared I had angered her.</p> +<p>"Gerda," I said, "have you forgotten how that in the holy island +I was wont to say that I should not rest until your were back in +your home?"</p> +<p>"I thought that you had forgotten," she said in a low voice. "I +had not."</p> +<p>"I seemed to forget it, because I deemed it best that I should +do so. I am but a landless warrior, with naught to offer. And +you--"</p> +<p>Then she turned quickly on me, and there was a smile on her face +and a new light in her eyes.</p> +<p>"And I," she said. "And I am naught but the girl who was found +by Asa Thor in the burning ship.</p> +<p>"O Malcolm, let it be so still, and take me to the end of the +voyage and bide there always. For I fear naught as long as you are +with me."</p> +<p>She held out her hands to me, and then she was in the shelter of +my arms, and no more was needed to be said. We were both content, +and more than content.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch17" id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: Homeward Bound.</h2> +<p>Mayhap I need not say that I forgot the message which took me to +this place, seeing that it was of no great account. Gerda and I had +much to say to one another of matters which would be of note to +none but ourselves, and the time fled unheeded by us.</p> +<p>Whereby it came to pass that presently came footsteps through +the woods, and here were Hakon and Bertric smiling at us, and Gerda +was blushing, though she would not leave my side. Bertric laughed +lightly when he met us.</p> +<p>"Hakon," he said, "I told you that there would be no trouble in +this matter. Now, Lady Gerda, and you, comrade, I am going to be +the first to wish you all happiness. And I will say that thus our +voyage ends even as it ought."</p> +<p>"It is not ended yet," said Hakon. "Still it remains for Malcolm +to win her home back for his bride that shall be, though that may +be easy."</p> +<p>Then he, too, spoke words of kindness to us both, and they were +good to hear; until at last he would tell us news which had come +from Thrandheim for himself, and that also was of the best.</p> +<p>The land had risen for him at the first sound of his name. Eric +was far away to the south and east, in the Wick, fighting with men +who would not bow to him, and all went well. The ships would go up +to the ancient town on the morning's tide.</p> +<p>"But now," he said, "I have no one to send with Gerda, for +Thoralf will take his wife and daughter with us. Will she wait here +for the winter, or will she sail, as once before, with you two to +serve and guard her?"</p> +<p>"Let us sail at once, King Hakon," she said, laughing. "It would +be impossible for me to wish for better care than that I have +learned to value most of all."</p> +<p>"Nay, but you shall be better attended at this time," Hakon +said, smiling.</p> +<p>And so in the end we learned that the matter had already been +arranged in all haste, for they had found two maidens to attend +Gerda, and the rough after cabin of the ship had been made somewhat +more fitting for her by the time we sailed in the morning.</p> +<p>Now we took Gerda back to Thoralf's wife, and thence I fled with +Bertric to the ship, there being more to say than I cared to listen +to. Dalfin sat on the deck, and he rose up sadly to greet us, with +a half groan.</p> +<p>"Good luck to you," he said, gripping my hand. "I have heard the +news. On my word, it was as well that we had no chance to get to my +father's court, or I should have been your rival, and there would +have been a fight. I will not say that it might not be a relief to +break the head of someone even now--but that may pass. The luck of +the torque has left me."</p> +<p>"Come with us after all," I said. "No doubt Arnkel will be +willing to give you just that chance."</p> +<p>But he shook his head. "No, I bide with Hakon. But there is +Asbiorn yonder who will see to Arnkel. And I am sorry for Arnkel if +they meet."</p> +<p>Now, whether it was true that Dalfin had his own thoughts +concerning the companion of our dangers I cannot say; but he bided +with Hakon, and thereafter won honour enough from him, and, indeed, +from all with whom he had to do. Princelike, and in all ways a good +comrade, was Dalfin.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that very early in the next dawning the ship +slid away from under the lee of the islands and headed southward on +her voyage, with cheers and good wishes to set her forth. The last +message we had from shore came from Dalfin the Prince, and that was +an Irish brogue of untanned deerskin, laced with gold, which flew +through the dusk like a bat to Gerda's feet from the deck of one of +Hakon's ships as we passed her. Words in the Erse came also from +the dim figure who cast it, whereat Phelim and I laughed. Gerda +asked what they were, and we had to tell her.</p> +<p>"Good luck to you for the thief of my heart," he cried. "If I +had not got one, and may never set eyes on your sweet face more, I +would wish you the same today and tomorrow."</p> +<p>"Not much heart-broken is Dalfin," said Bertric, laughing.</p> +<p>Thereafter is little which need be told of that voyage in the +still, autumn weather of the north. We passed, at times sailing, +and now and then with the oars going easily, and always in bright +weather, through the countless islands which fringe the Norway +shores, some bare and rocky, and some clad with birch and fir even +to the edge of the waves. Far inland the great mountains rose, +snow-capped now, and shone golden and white and purple in the +evening sun; and everywhere the forests climbed to meet the snow, +and the sound of the cattle horns came at the homing hour to tell +of the saeters hidden in the valleys.</p> +<p>Once we met a ship passing swiftly northward under oars, and +were not so sure that we might not have to fight or fly. But her +crew were flying from the south, and hailed us to know if it were +true that Hakon had come from England to claim his own. And when we +hailed in answer that so it was, and that we were of his force, the +men roared and cheered while we might hear them. Eric's day was +done.</p> +<p>I think that it was on the fifth day that we came at last to the +break in the line of fringing islands which marks the opening of +the Stavanger Fjord. There we met the long heave and swell of the +open sea, and it was good to feel the lift and quiver of the +staunch ship as she swung over the rollers again.</p> +<p>Across the open stretch of sea we sailed, and the land along +which we coasted was flat and sandy, all unlike that which we had +passed for so many days. But beyond that the mountains were not +far, though in no wise so high as those farther north. And at last +Gerda showed us the place where she had thought to lay Thorwald, +her grandfather, to rest in his ship. We could see the timber +slipway, which still had been left where it was made for that last +beaching, and we could see, too, that here and there the land was +turned up into heaps, where the place for the mound had been +prepared. There was a little village also, and a hut or two had +been burnt.</p> +<p>"Our doing," said Asbiorn. "Forgive us, Queen Gerda."</p> +<p>"You at least had no part therein," she said gently. "The rest +is forgotten. Now we have no long way to go before I am again at +home."</p> +<p>Now the land rose again from the level of the Jederen marshes we +had passed, and we had high black cliffs to port and ahead of us. +Along their feet the great rollers of the open sea broke, +thundering, even in this quiet weather, and the spray shot up and +fell in white clouds unceasingly. It was wonderful even now, and +what it would be like in a day of gale and heavy seas might be +guessed. And still we held on, with Asbiorn at the helm, though I +could see as yet no opening in the mighty walls that barred our way +onward. Gerda at my side laughed at me, in all pride in her +homecoming, and in the wild coast at which I was wondering.</p> +<p>The cliffs seemed to part us as we neared those before us, and I +saw a deep and narrow cleft between them into which we steered. The +sail was lowered now, and the oars manned, and so we passed from +the open into the shadow of the mighty cliffs which rose higher and +higher as we rowed between them. For half a mile the swell of the +sea came with us, and then it died away, and we were on still, deep +water, clear as glass, but black in the shadow of the grim and +sheer rock walls. The rhythm of the leisurely swing and creak and +plash of the long oars came back to us from either side as if we +rowed amid an unseen fleet, and when the men broke into the rowing +song they were fain to cease, laughing, for the echoes spoiled the +tune.</p> +<p>The fjord opened out before long, and there was another passage +to the sea, up which came a little swell from the open. The cliffs +to our right had been those of a great island which lies across the +mouth of the fjord itself, which we were but now entering. And then +again the cliffs closed in, and we were in the silence. On the +verge of the cliffs here were poised great stones, as if set to +roll down on those who would try to force a passage, but they were +more than man might lift. They might have been hove here by Jotuns +at play, so great were they, in truth.</p> +<p>Now, it was Asbiorn's plan that we should try to reach the upper +end of the fjord, where the hall and village lay, in the dusk of +evening, if we could do so, unseen. Gerda knew that it was unlikely +that we should be spied until we had passed higher yet; or, at +least, were we seen, that none would wonder at the return of a ship +which was known to be that of Heidrek. The brown sail which had +been our terror might help us here and now.</p> +<p>Far up its reaches the fjord branched, one arm running on toward +the east, and the other, which was our course, northward. Here, at +the meeting of these branches, there was a wider stretch of water, +ringed around with mountains which sloped, forest clad, to the +shores, and dotted with rocky islets round which the tide swirled +and eddied in the meeting of the two currents, for it was +falling.</p> +<p>We had timed our passage well, and would wait here until we +might find our way to the hall as the men were gathered for the +evening meal. Our plan was to land and surround the building, and +so take Arnkel if we could without any fighting.</p> +<p>Hidden away at the foot of a valley here was a little village, +but at first we saw no signs that we were noticed. Presently, +however, when Asbiorn had taken the ship into a berth between two +of the islets, and the men were getting her shore lines fast to +mooring posts which seemed to be used only now and then, a boat +with two men in it came off to us thence, and we were hailed to +know what we needed in these waters.</p> +<p>Asbiorn answered, saying that we were friends, waiting for tide +up the fjord, and they went ashore on the islet next them, and came +across it to us. Then Gerda rose up from where she sat watching +them and called them by name, and they started as if they had seen +a ghost, so that she laughed at them. At that they took courage, +and came nearer.</p> +<p>The stern of the ship was not more than a couple of fathoms from +the rock, and there they stood, and it was good to hear their +welcome of the lady whom they had deemed lost. Then they came on +board, and there was rejoicing enough, both in the finding, and in +the peace which would come with Gerda's return. They told us how +that Arnkel was carrying on his mastership here with a high hand, +being in no wise loved. They said that men blamed him for bringing +Heidrek on the land, seeing that he had made terms with him when it +would have been as well to fight; and that, moreover, there were +not a few who believed that in some way he had a hand in the loss +of Gerda. Now, he was trying to gather the men in order to go to +the help of Eric the King, who was fighting in the Wick, as we had +heard, and that was not at all to the mind of those who had +followed Thorwald. War in the Wick, beyond their ken altogether, +was no affair of theirs.</p> +<p>Whereby it was plain that here we were likely to do a very good +turn to Hakon at once, and we were just in time. Our ship, which +Heidrek had left here, was ready for sailing, as it seemed, and if +we had come a day or two later we should have lost Arnkel, and +maybe had trouble to follow.</p> +<p>Now, these two men were the pilots of the fjord, as we had +guessed from their coming off to us. At first they were for going +straightway and telling the men at the hall and town that Gerda had +come, but we thought it best to take that news ourselves. They +would steer us up the fjord in the dusk presently, and would answer +any hail from watchers who would spy our coming.</p> +<p>So we waited for the turn of the tide, and armed ourselves in +all bravery of gold and steel and scarlet as befitted the men of +Hakon and of Gerda the Queen, for she should go back to her own as +a queen should. And then a thought came to me, and I spoke of it to +Bertric, and so went and stood at the door of the cabin where Gerda +waited, and asked her to do somewhat for me.</p> +<p>"Will you not come back even as you went?" I asked. "Let the men +see you stand before them as you were wont, in your mail and helm +and weapons, the very daughter of warriors."</p> +<p>But she shook her head, smiling.</p> +<p>"No, Malcolm, it is foolishness. What need to put on the gear +which seems to make me what I am not?"</p> +<p>"Nothing will make you less than a sea queen, my Gerda," I said. +"Maybe I might say more than that, but you would think me only +flattering. I would have you wear the arms as surety to your folk +at first sight that you are indeed here again. It may save words, +and time."</p> +<p>So I persuaded her, and she left me to don the war gear for the +last time, as she told me. She would dress herself even as she had +been clad for the funeral and as we had found her.</p> +<p>Then the tide turned, and slowly the current from the sea found +its way up the fjord and reached us, and we warped out of the +narrow berth between the rocks, and manned the oars and set out on +the last stage of our voyage. The mast was lowered and housed by +this time, and the ship ready for aught. Only we did not hang the +war boards along the gunwales, and we had no dragon head on the +stem, for that Heidrek had not carried at any time. We had no mind +to set all men against the ship at first sight as an enemy who came +prepared for battle.</p> +<p>We entered the northern branch of the fjord, and at once the +high cliffs rose above us again, for the waterway narrowed until we +were in a deep cleft of the mountains. The water was still as glass +in the evening quiet, and as the stars came out overhead, we seemed +to be sailing under one deep sky and on another. But the oar blades +broke the water into brighter stars than those which were +reflected, and after us stretched a wake of white light between the +black cliffs, for the strange sea fires burnt in the broken waters +brightly, coming and going as the waves swirled around the ship's +path.</p> +<p>So we went steadily for a long way, and then we came to a place +where the rocky walls of the channel nearly met, so that one could +have thrown a stone from the deck on either as we passed. High up +on the left cliffside a little light glimmered, for a cottage hung +as it were on a shelf of the mountain above us. The measured beat +of the oars sounded hollow here as the sheer cliffs doubled their +sounds. Some man heard it, and a door opened by the little light, +like a square patch of brightness on the shadow of the +hillside.</p> +<p>Then he hailed us in a great voice which echoed back to us, and +one of the pilots answered him cheerily with some homely password, +and we saw his form stand black against his door for a moment +before he closed it, and he waved his hand to the friend whose +voice he knew. The pilot told me that it was his duty to listen for +passing ships thus and hail them. Beside his hut was piled a beacon +ready to light if all was not well, and in the hut hung a great, +wooden cattle lure wherewith to alarm the town. We were close to it +now.</p> +<p>By this time it was as if I knew the place well, so often had +Gerda told me of it. The fjord opened out from this narrow channel +into a wide lake from which the mountains fell back, seamed and +laced with bright streams and waterfalls, and clad with forests, +amid which the cornfields were scattered wherever the rocks gave +way to deeper soil. At the head of this lake, where a swift salmon +river entered the fjord, was the hall, set on rising ground above +the clustering houses of the town, and looking down over them to +the anchorage and the wharf for which we were making. Behind the +hall rose a sheer cliff, sheltering it and the other houses from +the north and east.</p> +<p>All this I was to see plainly hereafter. Before me now in the +dusk, which was almost darkness, as the ship slid from the narrows +into the open, was the wide ring of mountains and the still lake, +and across that the twinkling lights of the town, doubled in the +water below them, and above them all the long row of high-set +openings under the eaves of the hall itself, glowing red with the +flame of fire and torches, and flickering as the smoke curled +across and through them.</p> +<p>I wondered what welcome was waiting for us from those who were +gathered there, as I stood with Gerda on my arm beside our +comrades, who watched the pilots as they steered. Bertric was +there, and Phelim, who by this time spoke the Norse well enough, +besides Asbiorn.</p> +<p>There was some spur of hill between us and part of the town, for +the light seemed to glide from behind it as we held on, but its +mass was lost in the shadows. I was watching the lights as they +came, one by one, to view, and then of a sudden, on the blackness +of the cliff above the hall, shone out a cross of light, tall and +bright and clear, as it were a portent, or as set there to guard +the place. So suddenly did it come that I started, and I heard +Father Phelim draw in his breath with some words which I could not +catch.</p> +<p>"What is that?" I asked Gerda, under my breath and pointing.</p> +<p>She laughed gently, and her hand tightened on my arm.</p> +<p>"We were wont to call it Thor's hammer," she said. "We see it +from time to time, and it brings luck. Now it greets me and +you--but it is not the old sign to me any longer."</p> +<p>"It is strange," said Bertric. "Once you called on Asa Thor--and +here is that one to whom you called, and yonder--"</p> +<p>"No, no," she said, clinging to me, "it is no longer Thor's +hammer."</p> +<p>"It is the sign which shall be held dear here," said Phelim. "It +is the sign that all good has come to this place."</p> +<p>"So may it be," said Gerda softly, and I thought that the +reflection of the cross made a glimmering pathway from the hall to +the ship which bore her homeward.</p> +<p>But I had no time to wonder how and why that sign was there, for +now we were seen, and torches began to flicker along the wharf. Our +pilots spoke to Asbiorn, and he passed the word for men to go +forward with the shore warps, and the oar strokes slowed down. I +thought I saw the broad gleam of light as the doors of the hall +opened and closed again, and then a hail or two went back and forth +from the shore and us. The oars were laid in and we were alongside +the wharf, and quietly the rowers took their arms and sat in their +places, waiting, as they had been bidden. There were not more than +a score of men waiting us ashore, for it was supper time.</p> +<p>Then came a man from out of the town toward us, and by the time +we were moored he was on the wharf opposite the stern. He had on +helm and sword, but no mail, and his shield hung over his shoulder. +The men made way for him, and in the torchlight I saw that he was +gray-bearded and strong.</p> +<p>"It is Gorm the Steward," said Gerda to me, "He is my friend. +Let me speak to him."</p> +<p>"Ho, shipmaster!" cried Gorm. "Welcome, if you come in +friendship, as I suppose. Whence are you, and what would you?"</p> +<p>"Friends," said Asbiorn; "friends with a cargo some of you will +be glad to see."</p> +<p>"Aye, aye," answered the steward. "You traders always say that. +Well, that will wait for daylight. Meanwhile come up to the hall +and sup."</p> +<p>Then his eyes lit on the silent, mail-clad men at the oar +benches, and he started.</p> +<p>"Ho!" he cried sternly, "what is the meaning of all this show of +weapons?"</p> +<p>"Speak to him, Gerda," I said then, seeing that it was time.</p> +<p>She went to the rail and leaned over it. The red flares shone on +her mail and white dress and sparkling helm.</p> +<p>"Gorm," she cried softly; "Gorm, old friend--I have come +home!"</p> +<p>He stood for a moment as if turned to stone there on the wharf. +Then he shaded his eyes with his hand as if in broad daylight, and +stared at Gerda for but a moment, for she spoke his name once +more.</p> +<p>"Odin," he cried, "this is a good day--if my ears and eyes do +not play me false--yet it is hardly to be believed. Let me come on +board."</p> +<p>He hurried to the gangway, and there Gerda met him. One close +look was enough for him, and he bent his knee and kissed her hand +with words of welcome, and so would be made known to Bertric and +myself. He looked us up and down with a sharp glance and smiled, +and Gerda told her tale in a few words.</p> +<p>"True enough," he said; "for you wear the arms of the house, and +wear them well. I never thought to see one in the war gear of the +young master again and not to resent it--but Gerda will have made +no mistake. Now, what will you do? Arnkel sits in the hall, and +with him men who have come from Eric Bloodaxe the King."</p> +<p>"Hakon, Athelstane's foster son, is king," said Bertric. "There +is news for you. He is at Thrandheim, and the north has risen for +him. We are his men."</p> +<p>Gorm's eyes shone, and he whistled softly. "News indeed! This is +a day of wonders. What next?"</p> +<p>"How many of the men in the hall will stand by Arnkel when Gerda +is known?" I asked. "She would have no fighting if it can be +avoided."</p> +<p>Maybe a dozen--men who never knew her. That is of no account, +for there are two score of our folk supping there."</p> +<p>"Well, then," I said, "we will surround the hall and walk in +quietly and call on Arnkel to surrender. If he does not, we must +make him do so; but first Gerda's tale shall be told of him."</p> +<p>Then Gerda said: "Let me go into the hall first and speak with +Arnkel face to face. I have no fear of him, and I think that my +folk will stand by me."</p> +<p>Just for a moment we doubted if that was safe for her, but Gorm +the Steward had the last word.</p> +<p>"Let it be so," he said. "Gerda shall call to her men, and they +will not hang back. Then Arnkel must needs give in. Now, the sooner +the better for all concerned."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch18" id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: A Sea Queen's +Welcome.</h2> +<p>The folk ashore had made fast the ship by this time, and were +idly waiting while Gorm spoke to us. As yet they had paid no heed +to the lady with whom he talked, but wondered more at the quiet of +the men than aught else. I felt that they were growing uneasy, +though that Gorm found us friendly kept them from showing it. I +dare say they thought we were more messengers from Eric.</p> +<p>Now, Gorm bade us choose our men quickly and follow him, lest +some word should go to Arnkel of the armed ship which had come +instead of the peaceful trader which the pilots should have +brought. So I went down the starboard side and named a dozen men, +while Asbiorn did the same from the other bank of rowers, and as we +named them, they leapt up and fell in behind us. Then Asbiorn +said:</p> +<p>"Better that I am not seen unless wanted. I will go to the back +of the hall and see that none get away thence. What shall you do if +all goes well?"</p> +<p>"Take Arnkel and send him back to Hakon in the ship," I +answered. "That is the only thing possible. If he is foolish enough +to fight--well, he must take his chance."</p> +<p>Asbiorn nodded, and we went ashore, leaving that old courtman of +mine, Sidroc, in charge of the ship and the dozen men left with +her. The folk of the place thronged round to see us pass up the +town, and saw Gerda plainly for the first time. In another moment I +heard her name pass among them, and Gorm spoke to them, for there +was a growing noise of welcome.</p> +<p>"Steady, friends!" he said sternly, "steady! No need to tell +Arnkel that his time has come yet. Let us get to the hall quietly, +and thereafter shout as you like--</p> +<p>"Ho! stop that man!"</p> +<p>One had broken away from the crowd and was off toward the hall +at full speed, meaning, as I have no doubt, to warn Arnkel and win +reward. But he did not get far. A dozen men were after him, and had +him fast, and no other cared to follow his example.</p> +<p>There was a stockade round the hall and its outbuildings which +stood to right and left of it. The guest house was to the right, +and the bower, which was Gerda's own place, stood on the left, both +handsome timber buildings, with high-pitched roofs and carved +gables and doorways. The hall itself was like them, but larger, +with low, wide eaves that made, as it were, a gallery all round, +raised a little from the ground. Daylight showed that every timber +that could be seen was carved most wonderfully, but one could not +heed that now in the torchlight.</p> +<p>A man stood on guard in the stockade gate, and Gorm the Steward +spoke to him, bidding him salute the queen who had returned. He +gave one look at Gerda, and tossed his leathern helm in the air, +and so fell in with us as we crossed the courtyard to the great +door. From the hall came the pleasant sounds of song and laughter +from the courtmen within.</p> +<p>Gorm knocked and the doors flew open. The shipmen had been +expected to return with him for supper. I saw the whole place as we +stood there for the moment in the broad light of the torches on the +walls.</p> +<p>We entered at the end of the hall, and right over against us was +the high seat, where sat Arnkel and half a dozen other men. There +were no ladies with them, and for that I was glad. Two great fires +burnt on hearths on either side of the hall, halfway down its +length, and at this end sat at their trestle tables the thralls and +herdsmen and fishers of the house. Beyond the fires and below the +high place were the courtmen on either hand, so that from end to +end of the hall ran a clear way for the serving. With them were +their wives and daughters here and there, and there were many women +with the lesser folk nearer us as we entered. Some were carrying +round the ale jugs, and stood still to see us enter.</p> +<p>Asbiorn and his men left us even as the door opened, and went +quickly to the rear of the hall. I could see only one other door, +and that opened behind the high seat, being meant for the ladies of +the house, so that they could pass to the bower without going down +the noisy hall. It led to the open gallery round the building, +whence it was but a step to the bower.</p> +<p>Very bright and pleasant it all was, with the light flashing red +on the courtmen's arms on the walls behind them, and the glow of +the two great pine-log fires on the gay dresses of the women. And +Arnkel himself, a big man with long, reddish hair and bristling +beard, looked at his ease altogether, as he turned a laughing face +to see the guests who came.</p> +<p>There was a little hush as we came out of the shadow of the +great doorway, and everyone turned, of course, to see us. Gerda was +between Bertric and myself, and for the moment behind Gorm the +Steward, who ushered us in with all ceremony. She had her dark +cloak over her mail, and the hood of it hid her bright helm, and we +two were cloaked also. Behind us was Phelim, and then the men +followed. I waited until they were all inside the hall, and then +Gorm stepped aside, and Gerda stood forward.</p> +<p>"Ha!" said Arnkel, smiling broadly, "a lady. Welcome to our +hall, friends. It may be more to your liking than the sea, so late +in the year."</p> +<p>Gerda shook her long cloak from her, and stood before him at the +length of the hall, plain to be known, even as he had last set eyes +on her.</p> +<p>"Am I welcome, Arnkel?" she said in a cold voice, which had no +sign of a quiver in it. "I have come from the sea to which you sent +me."</p> +<p>Arnkel's red face went white and ghastly of a sudden, and he +sprang back from the table as if he had been smitten. The guests +with him stared at us and at him, speechless, for they were Eric's +men and knew nothing of Arnkel's ways. But the courtmen rose to +their feet with a wild medley of voices, for this thing seemed to +them beyond belief for the moment. Round us, amid the lesser folk, +was a silence, save for the rustle as they shifted and craned to +look at their young mistress. But there was a whisper growing among +them.</p> +<p>Now Arnkel came back to the table and set his hands on it, for +they shook, and stared at Gerda without finding a word in answer. +The courtmen were looking at him now, and her name was passing +among them in undertones. It was in Arnkel's power to make the best +of the return if he would.</p> +<p>"Friends," said Gerda, "yonder man sent me to what he deemed my +death in the ship which bore Thorwald to sea. Will you welcome me +back, if he will not?"</p> +<p>Then there was a great shout from the men who loved her, and I +thought that all was well. But suddenly that shout stilled, for +Arnkel's voice came loud over it all.</p> +<p>"Hold, you fools," he cried. "Look at yon armed men. This is a +trick of theirs. They have your lady captive, and now will win the +place if you suffer them.</p> +<p>"Here, you great warrior, who are you?"</p> +<p>He pointed to me, and the colour was coming back to his face, +while his eyes were fierce. He would make one bid for his power +yet.</p> +<p>"I am Malcolm of Caithness, the jarl," I answered. "I am the +champion of Queen Gerda, whom I and my comrade here saved from the +ship in which you would have burned her.</p> +<p>"Listen, Thorwald's men. We took her, well nigh dead, from the +chamber where your king was laid. See, what are these arms I wear? +They will prove it, for they came thence, and are her gift."</p> +<p>"Aye," he sneered in a harsh voice, "you took them at the same +time you took the girl.</p> +<p>"To your arms, men, and see that these robbers do not +escape."</p> +<p>The courtmen sprang at their weapons, and there was uproar +enough. For a moment I could not tell what might come, and my hand +was on my sword hilt, though I would not draw the weapon yet. Then +came Gerda's clear voice again.</p> +<p>"To me, Gerda's men," she cried, and her sword flashed out. "He +lies, and you know it."</p> +<p>Three men led a rush down the hall to us, and one was lame. They +were my Caithness men who had escaped from Asbiorn here. After and +with them were a dozen older courtmen of Thorwald's. The women +screamed and shrank back against the walls of the hall, hiding +behind the tables. We had naught to fear from the thralls here, for +they were shouting for Gerda.</p> +<p>One of Eric's men leaned over to Arnkel and spoke to him. Then +he shook his head and scowled at him, and stood up and raised his +hand.</p> +<p>"Here," he said, when a silence fell, "I am a stranger, and it +seems to me that there is matter for a fight, unless somewhat is +set straight. What is this tale brought up against your lord? I +have heard how Thorwald was set to sea in his ship."</p> +<p>Then old Gorm answered in a voice which shook with wrath: "And +with him, bound in the funeral chamber, with burning peat piled +round it, Arnkel set the Lady Gerda to burn at sea, even as you see +her. But for chance she had never stood in Arnkel's way more. She +is Thorwald's heiress."</p> +<p>In the silence which followed Gerda spoke again. Men were +doubting yet, and Arnkel's men had no mind to begin a fight which +would be fell enough.</p> +<p>"You have said that I am a captive, Arnkel," she said +calmly.</p> +<p>"Listen, friends, and say if so I am."</p> +<p>She half turned to me, and took my hand before them all, +smiling.</p> +<p>"This is my promised husband," she said proudly, "Jarl Malcolm, +who saved me. If I am captive, it is willingly.</p> +<p>"Now, Arnkel, I will let bygones be bygones. It shall be as it +was before the day when the ship was set adrift. Only you shall go +your way to the king, to be judged by him."</p> +<p>"Fair speech, Arnkel," said Eric's courtier. "Better listen to +it. You have to deal with yon Scots jarl--and I ken the +Scotsmen."</p> +<p>He sat down, watching the throng. He would take no hand in the +matter, wherein he was wise. But those words of his came to Arnkel +as a taunt, and his look at me was terrible.</p> +<p>"Ho, men," he shouted, "will you own an outland lord?"</p> +<p>"Aye, we will," said Gorm the Steward sturdily. "Sooner than +listen to a coward and would-be murderer of women."</p> +<p>That ended the matter. The courtmen yelled, and one or two who +tried to get to Arnkel's side were seized and hurled to the ground +by the men who cheered for Gerda, and I knew that the day was won. +But I watched Arnkel, for there was somewhat of madness in his +look. His hand stole down to the long dirk in his belt, and then +clutched it.</p> +<p>Like a flash the keen blade fled across the hall, straight at +Gerda as she stood fearless before him, and I was only just in +time. I stood on her right, and my left arm caught it. The blade +went through the muscles of the forearm, and stayed there, but that +was of no account. Gerda's light mail would hardly have stopped +it.</p> +<p>She gave a little cry, and I set my arm behind me, smiling. But +the men saw and roared, and there was not one on the side of the +man who would do so evil a deed. They made a rush for the dais, +overturning the tables, and hustling aside Eric's men, who were in +their way, else there would have been an end of Arnkel.</p> +<p>Maybe in the long run it had been as well for him, but in the +scuffle he opened the door behind him and rushed out. I heard a +shout from outside, and then a trampling, and thereafter a +silence.</p> +<p>Asbiorn was not far off. Afterwards I found that he had a ladder +against the wall, and a man was watching through a high window all +that went on, in case we needed help. Whereby it happened that +Arnkel ran into his arms.</p> +<p>Some of Asbiorn's men came in as soon as that was done, and the +courtmen huddled back at the sight of these newcomers, whose swords +were out. Gerda called to them that these were friends, and bade +our men sheathe their weapons.</p> +<p>There was quiet then, and Gerda looked round to me. Phelim had +taken charge of my arm at once, and the long blade was out, and a +scarf, which some girl who had not lost her senses had handed him, +was round the wound.</p> +<p>"Not much harm done," he said, smiling at Gerda, who thanked him +in words and me with a look.</p> +<p>Now the folk crowded round us with great shouts of welcome, and +the men came to thrust forward the hilts of their weapons that she +should touch them, in token of homage given and accepted. The women +were trying to reach her also, with words of joy and praise. So I +took her through them all to the high place, and set her there in +Thorwald's chair, and Gorm the Steward passed round some word, and +came himself with a silver cup full of mead, and set it in her +hand, and whispered to her.</p> +<p>Whereon she smiled and rose up, and held the cup high, and cried +to her folk:</p> +<p>"Skoal, friends, and thanks!"</p> +<p>And all down the hall, from her own folk and from Hakon's, and +even from those strangers, Eric's men, came the answer:</p> +<p>"Skoal to Gerda the Queen, and welcome!"</p> +<p>And then one lifted his voice and cried:</p> +<p>"Skoal to Jarl Malcolm!"</p> +<p>Men took that up, and it was good to hear them.</p> +<p>Gerda gave me the cup her lips had just touched, and I drank +"skoal" to them in turn, and so Gerda the Queen had come home.</p> +<p>Gerda passed to the bower presently, and left us in the hall. +The men still made merry with shout and song, and Gorm was +preparing the guest hall for us. Asbiorn had come in with the rest +of his men, grim and silent, and I asked him if he had Arnkel safe. +He nodded and reached for a horn of ale, and sat down at the end of +the high place, for at the time Bertric and I were talking with +Eric's men, and trying to settle matters with them, for we could +not let them go back to their master.</p> +<p>One was a jarl from the south, and the others men of less note, +and they had looked to gather men to Eric hence. Now they were +fairly thunderstruck to hear of the coming of Hakon, and as it +seemed to us not altogether displeased. There would be nothing but +turmoil in the land so long as Eric reigned.</p> +<p>In the end these men passed their word not to try to escape, or +to plot here for Eric, until they went back with the ship to +Thrandheim, and so we had no more trouble with them. Thereafter two +joined Hakon, as I have heard, and the others were glad to bide +quietly and at least not hinder him; so we did well for the young +king.</p> +<p>When we had arranged thus with these men, I went to Asbiorn to +learn how he had bestowed Arnkel.</p> +<p>"He is down at the wharf," he answered. "Aye, on board the ship. +Maybe you had better come and see him."</p> +<p>"I do not know that I have aught to say to him," said I. "The +man is not worth a word. What do the townsfolk say of him?"</p> +<p>"They had a good deal to say," he answered. "Not what one would +call good words, either. There is no party on his side here, and +you will have naught but welcome on all hands. Nevertheless, come +down to the ship before you go to the guest house for the night. I +sleep on board."</p> +<p>"The people cannot hold you as in league with Arnkel now," I +said. "They will not molest you."</p> +<p>"They know that there is no league between us now, at all +events," he answered, with a short laugh. "No, there will be no +trouble of any kind."</p> +<p>Bertric and I rose up and bade Eric's men go to the guest hall, +and so we two went out of the great door with Asbiorn. With us came +Phelim and my Caithness men, and Gorm the Steward, and a dozen of +the others of the place. It was a still, frosty night, and overhead +wavered and flickered across the stars the red and golden shafts +and waves of the northern lights, very brightly, so that all the +sky seemed to burn with them, and it was well nigh as light as day +with their weird brightness. Under them the still fjord glowed in +answer, silent and peaceful, as the fires burned up and faded.</p> +<p>We went to the stockade gate, and down the little street to the +wharf. Only a few men were about, but they were not armed, and the +houses were dark now. There was no sign of unrest in all the place, +as there well might have been had things gone awry for us.</p> +<p>"Have a care, Asbiorn," said Bertric. "There may be some +gathering to rescue Arnkel, for all the quiet."</p> +<p>He laughed again, and his laugh was hard.</p> +<p>"There will be none," he said, and pointed.</p> +<p>The mast of the ship had been stepped again, but the sail was +still on deck. Only a spare yard had been hoisted half-mast high +across the ship. And at the outboard end of it swung, black against +the red fires of the sky, the body of the man who had wrought the +trouble. He had found the death which he deserved.</p> +<p>"Hakon's word," said Asbiorn quietly. "You mind what he +said."</p> +<p>I remembered, and it came to me that Asbiorn had done right. I +do not know what else could have been done with such a man. And in +this matter neither I nor Gerda had any hand.</p> +<p>"The townsfolk judged him," said Asbiorn again, "and we did +Hakon's bidding. Else they had hewn him in pieces."</p> +<p>Suddenly the red wildfires sank, and it was very dark. In the +darkness there came from seaward a sound which swelled up, nearer +and nearer, as it were the cry of some mighty pack of hounds, and +with the wild baying, the yell of hunters and the clang of their +horns. It swept over us, and passed toward the mountains while we +stood motionless, listening.</p> +<p>"It is the wild hunt," said old Gorm, gripping my arm. "It is +Odin who chases the wraith of Arnkel hence."</p> +<p>But Phelim looked up to where against the dark cliff the cross +stood out bright above the hall.</p> +<p>"If it is Odin," he said, "he flies before the might of yonder +sign. This place is his no longer."</p> +<p>The others did not heed him, but I would that what he said was +the very truth. I had ever heard that one who died as did Arnkel +was the quarry of Odin's hunters for evermore, and the sounds +scared me.</p> +<p>The clamour of that wild hunt died away, and we breathed more +freely. Soon the wild lights burned up across the north again, and +then Bertric spoke.</p> +<p>"Sink yonder thing in the fjord, Asbiorn. Gerda should not see +it thus."</p> +<p>Therewith we went back to the guest hall, and there was naught +to disturb the quiet of the night. Asbiorn saw to that matter +straightway.</p> +<p>Men say now that when the northern fires light the sky, across +the fjord drifts the wraith of Arnkel, and that ever the wild hunt +comes up from the sea and hounds him hence. I have heard the bay of +those terrible hounds more than once indeed, but I have seen +naught, and round our hall is no unrest.</p> +<p>In the sunshine of next day Gerda would hear what had become of +Arnkel, supposing that he was kept safely somewhere. I think that +the hurt to me, small as it was, angered her against him more than +the wrongs he had done to herself.</p> +<p>"He is dead," I told her. "He died at the hand of Asbiorn and +the men of the place, in all justice. He may be forgotten."</p> +<p>She did not ask more, for the way in which he ended she would +not wish to hear. Only she sighed, and said:</p> +<p>"Let us forget him then. I would have forgiven him. He tried to +take even my life from me indeed, but instead he has given me all I +could long for. He sent me to meet you, Malcolm, on the sea."</p> +<p>Then she laid her hand on my bound arm gently, and smiled at +me.</p> +<p>"This is the second time you have saved my life," she said. "Nor +was there one to share the deed this time. You cannot bring in +Bertric and Dalfin now."</p> +<p>Which seemed to please her in a way which I will not try to +fathom. That sort of thing makes a man feel how little worth he is +in truth.</p> +<p>Then on that morning she must needs take me to see all the place +and the folk. My father's old ship lay in the fjord, ready to sail +to Eric, and she must hear how we escaped from her again. There +were more pleasant doings also, but I need not tell of them.</p> +<p>For now it seems to me that the story is done, if there must be +told one or two more things, seeing that Gerda had come home, and +all was well. I have no words to tell of the wedding that was +before Bertric must needs go back to Hakon, for none but a lady +could compass that. But I will say that it was a goodly gathering +thereat, for word went quickly round, and the good people came in +to grace it from far and wide. Bertric gave away the bride, as the +friend of Hakon, who was her guardian; and after the wedding in the +old Norse way, Phelim blessed us after the manner of the new faith +which he and his had taught us to love, though he might not do more +for us, as yet unbaptized.</p> +<p>Thereafter was feasting and rejoicing enough to please all, if +the notice had been short; and then Bertric must go his way, +promising to see us again as soon as might be. So we watched the +ship pass down the fjord and into the narrow seaward channel, and +he waved to us, and we to him, and the men cheered for Hakon, and +so we turned back to the new life of peace that lay before us.</p> +<p>There was not much fighting ere Hakon came to the throne in +earnest. Eric fled the land as man after man rose for his rival, +and at last took to the Viking path, and thereafter made friends +with Athelstane of England, and held Northumbria for him as +under-king. So he troubled Norway no more.</p> +<p>But for the spreading of the new faith Hakon would have had no +man against him; but therein he had unrest enough. Maybe it was to +be expected, as he went to work with too high a hand in that matter +in his zeal; for here we had no trouble. Phelim and Gerda won the +folk with ways and words of love, and before two years had passed +all were working to frame a church here with much pride in the +building, giving time and labour for naught but the honour of the +faith.</p> +<p>Hakon came to the consecrating of that church, and with him were +Bertric and Dalfin, and then those good friends of ours stood +sponsors for us at the first christenings that were therein.</p> +<p>Thereafter Bertric went home to England, and we have seen him no +more. Only we know that he is high in honour with his king, and +happily wedded in his Dorset home. Dalfin is still in Norway, and +high in honour with Hakon, and here he will bide, being wedded, and +holding himself to be a very Norseman. There might be worse than +he, in all truth. And Asbiorn is with Hakon, as the head of his +courtmen, silent and ready, and well liked by all. Those two we see +when Hakon goes on progress through the land, and comes in turn to +us, as he ever will, or else when we go to the court, when that is +near us.</p> +<p>Still over the hall against the black cliff glows the bright +cross at times, clear and steady. Men say that it does but come +from some unseen openings in the roof of the hall when the lights +are set in some unheeded way--but I cannot tell. However it comes, +it has been a portent of good, and minds me of that night when we +brought home at last my sea queen, Gerda. Surely it is a token of +the peace which has come to us and to her folk, under the wise rule +of Norway's first Christian king, Hakon the Good.</p> +<h2><a name="Notes" id="Notes">Notes.</a></h2> +<dl> +<dt><a name="Note1" href="#Glyph1" id="Note1">1.</a></dt> +<dd>The Norns were the Fates of the old Norse mythology.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note2" href="#Glyph2" id="Note2">2.</a></dt> +<dd>Thrandheim, now Trondhjem, the ancient capital of Norway.</dd> +</dl> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's A Sea Queen's Sailing, by Charles Whistler + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A SEA QUEEN'S SAILING *** + +***** This file should be named 15951-h.htm or 15951-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/5/9/5/15951/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> |